LV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors

from 80 to 3200 A Compact NS

Catalogue

2006

The Guiding System, the new way to create your electrical installations
A comprehensive offer of products with consistent design The Guiding System is first and foremost a Merlin Gerin product offer covering all electrical distribution needs. However, what makes all the difference is that these products have been designed to operate together: mechanical and electrical compatibility, interoperability, modularity, communication. Thus the electrical installation is both optimised and more efficient: better continuity of supply, enhanced safety for people and equipment, guaranteed upgradeability, effective monitoring and control. Tools to simplify design and implementation With the Guiding System, you have a comprehensive range of tools - the Guiding Tools - that will help you increase your product knowledge and product utilisation. Of course this is in compliance with current standards and procedures. These tools include technical booklets and guides, design aid software, training courses, etc. and are regularly updated.

For a genuine partnership with you Because each electrical installation is unique, there is no standard solution. With the Guiding System, the variety of combinations allows for genuine customisation solutions. You can create and implement electrical installations to meet your creative requirements and design knowledge. You and Merlin Gerins Guiding System form a genuine partnership. For more details on the Guiding System, consult www.merlin-gerin.com

A consistent design of offers from Medium Voltage to Ultra terminal

All Merlin Gerin offers are designed according to electrical, mechanical and communication consistency rules. The products express this consistency by their overall design and shared ergonomics.
Electrical consistency: Each product complies with or enhances system performance at coordination level: breaking capacity, Isc, temperature rise, etc. for more safety, continuity of supply (discrimination) or economic optimisation (cascading). The leading edge technologies employed in Merlin Gerins Guiding System ensure high performance levels in discrimination and cascading of protection devices, electrodynamic withstand of switches and current distributors, heat loss of devices, distribution blocks and enclosures. Likewise, inter-product ElectroMagnetic Compatibilty (EMC) is guaranteed.

Discrimination guarantees co-ordination between the operating characteristics of serial-connected circuit-breakers. Should a fault occurs downstream, only the circuit-breaker placed immediately upstream from the fault will trip.

Mechanical consistency: Each product adopts dimensional standards simplifying and optimising its use within the system. It shares the same accessories and auxiliaries and complies with global ergonomic choices (utilisation mode, operating mode, setting and configuration devices, tools, etc.) making its installation and operation within the system a simpler process.

Prefabricated and tested solutions, upstream and downstream from the device complying with the IEC 60439-1 switchboard standard.

Communication consistency:
Thanks to the use of standard Web technologies, you can offer your customers intelligent Merlin Gerin switchboards allowing easy access to information: follow-up of currents, voltages, powers, consumption history, etc.

Each product complies with global choices in terms of communication protocols (Modbus, Ethernet, etc.) for simplified integration in the management, supervision and monitoring systems.

Guiding Tools for more efficient design and implementation of your installations.

SM6
Medium voltage switchboard system from 1 to 36 kV

Sepam
Protection relays

Masterpact
Protection switchgear from 100 to 6300 A

Trihal MV/LV dry cast resin transformer from 160 to 5000 kVA

Evolis MV vacuum switchgear and components from 1 to 24 kV.

The Technical guide

These technical guides help you comply with installation standards and rules i.e.: The electrical installation guide, the protection guide, the switchboard implementation guide, the technical booklets and the co-ordination tables all form genuine reference tools for the design of highperformance electrical installations. For example, the LV protection co-ordination guide - discrimination and cascading optimises choice of protection and connection devices while also increasing markedly continuity of supply in the installations.

CAD software and tools

The CAD software and tools enhance productivity and safety. They help you create your installations by simplifying product choice through easy browsing in the Guiding System offers. Last but not least, they optimise use of our products while also complying with standards and proper procedures.

Compact
Protection switchgear system from 100 to 630 A

Multi 9
Modular protection switchgear system up to 125 A

Prisma Plus
Functional system for electrical distribution switchboards up to 3200 A

Pragma Enclosures for distribution switchboards up to 160 A

Canalis Prefabricated Busbar Trunking from 25 to 4000 A

PowerLogic Power management

Training
Training allows you to acquire the Merlin Gerin expertise (installation design, work with power on, etc.) for increased efficiency and a guarantee of improved customer service. The training catalogue includes beginners courses in electrical distribution, knowledge of MV and LV switchgear, operation and maintenance of installations, design of LV installations to give but a few examples.

046751-13

New Compact NS, setting the standard, once again...

Compact NS80 A.

Compact NS100 to 250 A.

The launch of Merlin Gerin Compact NS in 1994 revolutionised the world of moulded-case circuit breakers. Innovative, flexible and attractive, Compact NS rapidly set the standard in its field. Today, Schneider Electric continues to innovate, extending the Compact NS range to high power ratings to offer a comprehensive and consistent range from 80 to 3200 A. Equipped with the new generation of Micrologic control units, Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers integrate electrical measurement and analysis functions. The communications option makes it possible to control power consumption, simplify maintenance and improve operating comfort. A wide range of optimised auxiliaries and accessories is also available to meet the needs of even more applications.

PB101044-19

PB101045-15

Compact NS400 to 630 A.

Compact NS, simply a step ahead

PB101669-26

Compact NS630 to 1600 A.

E45178R-60

Compact NS1600 to 3200 A.

Compact NS

General contents
Presentation
6

Functions and characteristics

15

Installation recommendations

143

Dimensions, volumes

165

Connection

203

Electrical diagrams

219

Additional characteristics

251

Catalogue numbers

265

Compact NS, even more applications...

Protection of LV distribution systems
E20999

p. 18
Protection for: b distribution systems supplied by transformers b distribution systems supplied by engine generator sets b long cables in IT and TN systems. Installation : b in power switchboards b on DIN rails (see page 50) Special applications: b single-phase and two-phase systems (see page 36) b 1000 V distribution systems (see page 38) b 400 Hz distribution systems (see page 40) b DC systems (see page 42). All circuit breakers in the Compact NS range offer positive contact indication and are suitable for isolation in compliance with standards IEC 60947-1 and 2.

push to trip

Protection of motor feeders

E26988

p. 52
When combined with a motor starter, Compact NS circuit breakers protect the cables and the starter against short-circuits. Equipped with an electronic trip unit, Compact NS circuit breakers also protect the cables, starter and motor against overloads. The exceptional current-limiting capacity of Compact NS circuit breakers automatically ensures type-2 coordination with the motor starter, in compliance with standard IEC 60947-4-1.

Protection of machines
E44356

p. 60
The different circuit-breaker versions in the Compact NS range are designed to meet the specific requirements of machines: b compliance with international standards IEC 60947-2 and UL 508 / CSA 22-2 No. 14 b compliance with U.S. standard UL 489 b protection against overloads and short-circuits b positive contact indication b installation in universal and functional enclosures.

Earth-leakage protection
E44357

p. 64
Additional earth-leakage protection protects life and property against the risks of faulty insulation in the installation. Depending on the circuit breaker, earth-leakage protection is provided by: b adding a Vigi module to the circuit breaker b using a specific Micrologic control unit b using a Vigirex relay and separate toroids.

M G

Control and isolation

E21272

p. 66
A switch-disconnector version of Compact NS circuit breakers exists for circuit control and isolation. All the additional functions may be combined with the basic switch-disconnector function, including: b earth-leakage protection b motor mechanism b ammeter, etc. For information on other switch-disconnector ranges, see the Interpact (offering positive contact indication and visible break) and Fupact (fuse switch) catalogues.

push to trip

Source-changeover systems
E32454

p. 76 (see also the "Source-changeover systems" catalogue)

To ensure a continuous supply of power, some electrical installations are connected to two power sources: b a normal source b a replacement source on hand to supply the installation when the normal source is not available. A mechanical and/or electrical interlocking system between two Interpact, Compact or Masterpact devices avoids all risk of parallel connection of the sources during switching. A source-changeover system can be: b manual with mechanical interlocking between the devices b remote operated when an electrical interlocking function in added b automatic when a controller is added to manage switching from one source to the other on the basis of external parameters.

UL 489 applications
Compact NS circuit breakers also meet the requirements of applications governed by standard UL 489 (see the corresponding catalogue).

...a solution for all installation configurations

The Compact NS range now covers all ratings from 80 to 3200 A: b Compact NS80 to 1600 A, fixed, withdrawable, front or rear connections, manual or electrical operation. b Compact NS1600 to 3200 A, fixed, front connection, manual operation.
DB105159 DB105164

Compact NS100 to 630

Breaking capacity Icu at 415 V
DB101838

L 150 kA H 70 kA SX 50 kA N 50 kA

NS100 N
Ui 750 V Ue (V) 220/240 380/415 440 500 525 660/690 250
50/60Hz

NS100 SX
Ui 750 V Ue (V)
220/240 380/415 440 500 525 660/690 250 Ics = 100% Icu

N 36 kA
Icu(kA)
90 50 50 36 35 10 70

Uimp 8 kV

Uimp 8 kV

Icu(kA) Ics%
85 36 35 25 22 8 50
100 100 100 50 50 50 100

NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630

cat A

50/60Hz

cat A

IEC / EN 60947-2
AS UNE CEI BS UTE VDE NEMA

IEC / EN 60947-2
AS UNE CEI BS UTE VDE NEMA

N: standard breaking capacity.

SX: reinforced breaking capacity.

DB105165

DB105166

NS100 H
Ui 750 V Ue (V)
220/240 380/415 440 500 525 660/690 250 Ics = 100% Icu

NS100 L
Ui 750 V Ue (V) 220/240 380/415 440 500 525 660/690 250
Ics = 100% Icu

Uimp 8 kV

Uimp 8 kV Icu(kA) 150 150 130 100 100 75 100 cat A

Icu(kA)
100 70 65 50 35 10 85

Compact NS630b to 1600

Breaking capacity Icu at 415 V
DB107663

50/60Hz

cat A

50/60Hz

IEC / EN 60947-2
AS UNE CEI BS UTE VDE NEMA

IEC / EN 60947-2
AS UNE CEI BS UTE VDE NEMA

H: high breaking capacity.

L: very high breaking capacity.

The rating plates on the front panel of each device indicate the breaking capacity (N, SX, H or L).

Total discrimination as standard

E22051

Compact NS1600b to 3200

Breaking capacity Icu at 415 V
E58551
push to trip

Discrimination between Compact NS circuit breakers is total for all types of faults (overloads, high or low shortcircuits) and whatever the type of trip unit used with the circuit breaker.

PB101050_24

Compact NS400 with electronic trip unit

041879

Manual Compact NS250 with thermal-magnetic trip unit

PB101044_28

047313

Compact NS250 with motor mechanism

Plug-in Compact NS250 on base

Withdrawable Compact NS250 on chassis

PB101669-37

Manually operated Compact NS800

E45163

Electrically operated Compact NS800

E45178R-63

Compact NS2000 (manually operated only)

...simplified installation

Compact circuit breakers make it possible to standardise switchboards for faster installation and fewer errors. All type L (150 kA) and LB (200 kA) Compact circuit breakers are housed in the same case as the type N and type H models with the same ratings. Compact circuit breakers up to 1600 A can be easily installed side-by-side in a minimum amount of space.

5 frame sizes from 80 to 3200 A

PB101043_15 PB101044_16

046751

80 A

100 to 250 A

400 to 630 A

PB101669-26

630 to 1600 A

E45178R_55

1600 to 3200 A

Many connection possibilities

Numerous connection possibilities, including front and rear connections for bare cables, cable lugs or bars, as well as plug-in or withdrawable versions, are available using accessories that can be rapidly added to the circuit breaker.
041650

Connection parts for Compact NS

Plug-in and withdrawable versions

Plug-in and withdrawable versions for: b fast removal or insertion of the circuit breaker without exposure to live parts b standby outgoing circuits ready for wiring and circuit breaker installation at a later date b visible break possibility.
042788 E32455

Busways
Compact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A can be installed in tap-off units of the Telemecanique Canalis range of busbar trunking.

10

...optimised protection and accurate measurements

Each Compact NS circuit breaker provides different types of protection, depending on the trip unit or control unit selected. Additional measurement and indication functions are available: b on Compact NS100 to 630, by adding an electrical auxiliary to the circuit breaker b on Compact NS630b to 3200, depending on the Micrologic control unit selected.
Compact NS100 to 630
On Compact NS100 to NS250 circuit breakers, the thermal-magnetic and electronic trip units are interchangeable and may be rapidly fitted to the circuit breakers. It is therefore easy to change the protection of a given circuit following a modification in an installation. On Compact NS400 and NS630 circuit breakers, the electronic trip units are interchangeable, plug-in modules. The STR53UE trip unit offers a large number of protection settings: standard: b specific indication of the different types of faults (overloads, short-circuits, etc.) optional: b built-in ammeter b earth-fault protection b communication: transmission of all information concerning circuit-breaker operation to an electrical distribution control, monitoring and automation system (see page 74).
PB101050_33 048287 041638

TM thermal-magnetic trip unit

045212 041641

Voltage presence indication module

Compact NS250

STR electronic trip unit

Ammeter module

Compact NS630b to 3200

Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers are equipped with Micrologic control units that are interchangeable on site. Micrologic 2.0 and 2.0 A control units offer standard protection. Micrologic 5.0 and 5.0 A control units offer selective protection that can be completed by earth-fault protection on Micrologic 6.0 A and earth-leakage protection on Micrologic 7.0 A control units. The ammeter version of Micrologic control units provides current measurements. These units are equipped with a digital display and bargraph, used in conjunction with simple navigation buttons. Access to the desired parameters and settings is direct and navigation between screens is intuitive. Settings are greatly simplified by direct display on the screen.
PB101669-41

Micrologic 2.0, 5.0 Compact NS800

056479

Micrologic 2.0 A, 5.0 A, 6.0 A, 7.0 A

056480

11

...an optimised range

A complete system of add-on modules for Compact NS: Fewer catalogue numbers means immediate availability of parts for all solutions. Trip units, control units, auxiliaries and installation and connection accessories are the same for a given frame size and often for a number of frame sizes (e.g. auxiliary contacts, MN and MX voltage releases, etc.): b Compact NS800 to NSA160 b Compact NS100 to NS250 b Compact NS400 to NS630 b Compact NS630b to 1600 b Compact 1600b to 3200.

16 15

5 12

E24603

1 7 9 10 8 11

13

2 2 4 3 6 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Breaking unit Trip units or control units Vigi earth-leakage protection module Insulation monitoring module Voltage presence indicator Ammeter module MN and MX voltage releases Multifunction auxiliary contact Direct rotary handle Extended rotary handle Motor mechanism Plug-in base Connection of auxiliary circuits to plug-in base or withdrawable chassis Connection accessories Short terminal shields Long terminal shields

12

...modern products

Open communication

For integration in supervision systems, Compact NS circuit breakers can be equipped with optional communication solutions. For Compact NS100 to NS630, two solutions are available: b NS100 to NS630 circuit breakers equipped with any trip unit and: v a TCU measurement module associated with a Power Meter to handle all measurements. In this case, an optional Power Meter input/output module can be used to display the status of the different contacts and initiate remote control functions v an Adventys OTB Modbus network interface module with integrated inputs/ outputs. This OTB module communicates the status of all auxiliary contacts via the Modbus network b NS400 or NS630 circuit breakers associated with a Modbus DC150 interface and: v STR53UE or STR43ME electronic trip units with the communication option v communicating contacts v communicating motor mechanisms. Compact NS630 to NS3200 can be equipped with Micrologic control units and communication modules.

DB105136

: wiring : communication bus : Modbus bus : Ethernet

ed discharg

O OFF

-2 IEC947BS CEI VDE

UTE

UNE

NEMA

0 125/16
push to trip

D TM 250 C 250A/40

-2 IEC947BS CEI VDE

UTE

UNE

NEMA

0 125/16
push to trip

D TM 250 C 250A/40

Im 10 Ir
.8 .9 9 8

5 6 7

Im 10 Ir Ir Im
1 .8 .9 9 8

5 6 7

Ir

Im

1
discharged

x 250A

x 250A

O OFF

x 250A

x 250A

O
push OFF

I
push ON

BS IEC947-2 CEI VDE UTE

UNE

NEMA

125/160
push to trip

D TM 250 250A/40C

Im 10 Ir
.8 .9 9 8

5 6 7
discharged

Ir

Im

O OFF O
push OFF

x 250A

I
push ON
BS IEC947-2 CEI VDE UTE UNE NEMA

-2 IEC947BS CEI VDE

UTE

UNE

NEMA

x 250A

push to trip

0 125/16
5 6

D TM 250 C 250A/40

125/160
push to trip

D TM 250 250A/40C

Im 10 Ir
.8 .9 9 8

Im 10 Ir
.8 .9 9 8

5 6 7

Ir

Im

1
Ir Im

x 250A

x 250A

x 250A

O
push OFF

I
push ON

x 250A

and protection of the environment

Schneider Electric fully takes into account environmental requirements, starting right from the design stage of products through to the end of their service life: b the materials used for Compact NS are not dangerous for the environment b the production facilities are non-polluting in compliance with the ISO 14001 standard b filtered breaking for the high ratings eliminates pollution in the switchboard b the energy dissipated per pole is low, making energy losses insignificant b the materials are marked to facilitate sorting for recycling at the end of product service life.

13

14

Compact NS

Functions and characteristics

Selection of a Compact circuit breaker depends on the application requiring protection (distribution systems, motor feeders, etc.) and on the prescribed installation conditions (see section Installation, connection and accessories).

Presentation

General characteristics Protection of distribution systems

Overview of solutions Compact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A Compact NS circuit breakers from 630 up to 3200 A TM and STR trip units for Compact NS100 to 250 STR trip units for Compact NS400 to 630 Micrologic control units for Compact NS630b to 3200 Special cases: b AC and DC single-phase and two-phase systems b 1000 V systems b 400 Hz applications b DC systems b incoming circuit breakers in final distribution NSA160

16 18
18 20 22 24 26 30 36 38 40 42 50

Motor protection

52

Overview of solutions 52 Compact NS80H-MA 54 NS100 to 630 circuit breakers with MA magnetic trip units 55 NS100 to 250 circuit breakers with STR22ME electronic trip unit 56 NS400 to 630 circuit breakers with STR43ME electronic trip unit 58

Protection of industrial control panels

Overview of solutions Circuit breaker NSC100N Trip units, auxiliaries, installation enclosures UL508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 marking

60
60 61 62 63

Earth-leakage protection
Overview of solutions Add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact) for Compact NS100 to 630

64
64 65

Control and isolation

Overview of solutions Compact NSA125NA and NSA160NA switch-disconnectors Compact NSC100 and NS100 to 630NA switch-disconnectors Compact NS630bNA to 1600NA switch-disconnectors Compact NS1600bNA to 3200NA switch-disconnectors

66
66 68 70 72 74

Source-changeover systems
Presentation Manual source-changeover systems Remote-operated systems Controllers

76
76 77 78 79

Communication
Compact NS100 to 630 Compact NS630b to 1600 Compact NS1600b to 3200 Compact and the MPS100 Micro Power Server

80
80 82 86 88

Electrical and mechanical accessories

Compact NS80H-MA Compact NSC100N, NSA160 Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) Compact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and withdrawable versions) Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version) Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable version) Compact NS1600b to 3200 (fixed version)

90
90 91 96 97 116 117 135

Test equipment Display modules

Installation recommendations Dimensions, volumes Connection Electrical diagrams Additional characteristics Catalogue numbers

140 141
143 165 203 219 251 265
15

Functions and characteristics

General characteristics

DB105167

Compliance with standards

NS160 H
Ui 750 V Uimp 8 kV Ue (V) Icu (kA) 100 70 65 50 35 10 85 220/240 380/415 440 500 525 660/690 250

Ics = 100% Icu

50/60Hz cat A

Standardised characteristics indicated on the rating plate: Ui: rated insulation voltage Uimp: rated impulse withstand voltage Icu: ultimate breaking capacity, for various values of the rated operational voltage Ue cat: utilisation category Icw: rated short-time withstand current Ics: service breaking capacity suitable for isolation

Compact NS circuit breakers and auxiliaries comply with the following: b international recommendations: v IEC 60947-1 - general rules v IEC 60947-2 - circuit breakers v IEC 60947-3 - switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors, etc. v IEC 60947-4 - contactors and motor starters v IEC 60947-5.1 and following - control circuit devices and switching elements; automatic control components b European (EN 60947-1 and EN 60947-2) and the corresponding national standards: v France NF v Germany VDE v U.K. BS v Australia AS v Italy CEI b the specifications of the marine classification companies (Veritas, Lloyds Register of Shipping, Det Norske Veritas, etc.) b French standard NF C 79-130 and the recommendations issued by the CNOMO organisation for the protection of machine tools. For U.S. UL, Canadian CSA, Mexican NOM and Japanese JIS standards, please consult us.

Pollution degree
Compact NS circuit breakers are certified for operation in pollution-degree III environments as defined by IEC standard 60947 (industrial environments).

Tropicalisation
Compact NS circuit breakers have successfully passed the tests prescribed by the following standards for extreme atmospheric conditions: b IEC 68-2-1 - dry cold (-55 C) b IEC 68-2-2 - dry heat (+85 C) b IEC 68-2-30 - damp heat (95 % relative humidity at 55 C) b IEC 68-2-52 - salt mist (severity level 2).

Environmental protection
Compact NS circuit breakers take into account important concerns for environmental protection. Most components are recyclable and the parts of Compact NS630b to NS3200 circuit breakers are marked as specified in applicable standards.

Ambient temperature
b Compact NS circuit breakers may be used between -25 C and +70 C. For temperatures higher than 40 C (65 C for circuit breakers used to protect motor feeders), devices must be derated as indicated in the documentation. b circuit-breakers should be put into service under normal ambient operatingtemperature conditions. Exceptionally, the circuit breaker may be put into service when the ambient temperature is between -35 C and -25 C. b the permissible storage-temperature range for Compact NS circuit breakers in the original packing is -50 C (1) to +85 C.

Discrimination
As standard, the Compact NS range ensures discrimination between two circuit breakers positioned in series in an installation.
E22037

CB1

CB2

(1) -40 C for Micrologic control units with an LCD screen.

16

044334R_55

Positive contact indication

All Compact NS circuit breakers are suitable for isolation as defined in IEC standard 60947-2: b the isolation position corresponds to the O (OFF) position b the operating handle cannot indicate the OFF position unless the contacts are effectively open b padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open. Installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does not alter the reliability of the position-indication system. The isolation function is certified by tests guaranteeing: b the mechanical reliability of the position indication system b the absence of leakage currents b overvoltage withstand capacity between upstream and downstream connections.

E18569

Installation in class II switchboards

All Compact NS circuit breakers are class II front face devices. They may be installed through the door of class II switchboards (as per IEC standard 60664), without downgrading switchboard insulation. Installation requires no special operations, even when the circuit breaker is equipped with a rotary handle or a motor mechanism.

Degree of protection
As per standards IEC 60529 (IP degree of protection) and EN 50102 (IK degree of protection against external mechanical impacts).

Bare circuit breaker with terminal shields

E18570

With toggle

IP40

IK07

push to trip

E28439

With direct rotary handle standard / VDE

ON I

IP40

IK07

push to trip

O OFF

Circuit breaker installed in a switchboard

With toggle
E21277

IP40

IK07

push to trip

ON I

With direct rotary handle standard / VDE MCC CNOMO

E28440

IP40 IP435 IP547

IK07

push to trip

O OFF

With extended rotary handle

E28441

IP55

IK08

ON I

push to trip

O OFF

ON I

OFF

E28442

With motor mechanism

IP40

IK07

push to trip

/auto manu

O
push OFF

I
push ON

17

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems Overview of solutions

Protection of distribution systems means protection of: b systems supplied by a transformer b systems supplied by an engine generator set b long cables in IT and TN systems.

E58563

E43842

E20999

Power distribution
Selection of circuit breakers up to 630 A
Rated current (A)
push to trip

page 20
60 400
NS400
PB101044_15

12.5 12.5 125 100

NS125E NS100

12.5 12.5 160 250

NS160 NS250

250 630
NS630

Compact

Breaking capacity (kA rms) 380/415 V

E N SX H L

PB101043_12

16 36 50 70 150 36 50 70 150 36 50 70 150 50 70 150 50 70 150

Accompanying trip units up to 630 A

DC systems, see page 42

page 22

Interchangeable thermal-magnetic and electronic trip units for NS100 to 630 and built-in thermal-magnetic trip unit for Compact NS125E

Selection of circuit breakers from 630 to 3200 A page 24

+
E43843

Rated current (A)

Compact
PB101669-19

250 320 630 800

NS630b NS800

400 1000
NS1000

500 1250
NS1250

640 1600
NS1600

A special range of circuit breakers is available for DC applications. The Compact NS DC range, from 16 A to 630 A, offers solutions for the many types of DC installations. Features include: b 1, 2, 3 and 4 pole versions up to 160 A and 3 and 4 pole versions from 250 A to 630 A b high breaking capacities for DC voltages from 12 to 750 V b compatibility with the many accessories of the standard Compact NS range b accessories for isolation and series or parallel connection of poles, designed for the special needs of DC applications.

Breaking capacity (kA rms) 380/415 V

N H L LB

50 70 150 200

50 70 150 200

50 70 150 -

50 70 -

50 70 -

Rated current (A)

Compact
E45178R_40

640 800 ... 1600 2000

NS1600b NS2000

1000 1250 2500 3200

NS2500 NS3200

Breaking capacity (kA rms) 380/415 V

N H

70 85

70 85

70 85

Accompanying control units up to 3200 A

page 30

Micrologic electronic control units may be used on all Compact NS630b to NS3200 circuit breakers and can be changed on site.

18

Power distribution (cont.)

Single-phase or two-phase distribution
Rated current (A)
Compact
PB101047_09

page 36
160 250

16 100
NS100 1P/2P
PB101048_13

125 160

NS160 1P/2P NS250 1P Built-in thermal-magnetic trip units

Breaking capacity (kA rms) 220 V

N H

1P 25 40

2P 85 100

1P 25 40

2P 85 100

1P 25 -

1000 V distribution
Rated current (A)
Compact
053182

page 38
60 400
NS400 1000V Breaking capacity: 10 kA rms at 1000 V STR23SP electronic trip unit specially designed for 1000 V applications

E21000

Incoming circuit breakers in final distribution

Rated current (A)
048016

page 50

16 160
NSA160 Breaking capacity (kA rms) 380/415 V: E: 16 kA N: 36 kA Built-in trip unit

Compact installation on a DIN rail

19

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems Compact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A

Compact circuit breakers
Number of poles Control manual electric fixed plug-in (on base) withdrawable (on chassis) toggle direct or extended rotary handle front connection rear connection front connection rear connection front connection rear connection

PB101050_33

Connections

Compact NS250H

Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2 Rated current (A) In 40 C 65 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz DC Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220/240 V 50/60 Hz 380/415 V 440 V 500 V 525 V 660/690 V Service breaking capacity (kA rms) lcs % Icu Suitability for isolation Utilisation category Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical electrical 440 V In/2 In Electrical characteristics as per NEMA AB1 (H.I.C.) Breaking capacity (kA) 240 V 480 V 600 V 240 V 480 V 600 V

PB101044_42

Electrical characteristics as per UL508 Breaking capacity (kA) Compact NS630N Protection Trip units Overload protection Short-circuit protection Earth-fault protection Zone selective interlocking Add-on earth-leakage protection Current measurements Additional measurement, indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts MX shunt and MN undervoltage releases Voltage-presence indicator Current-transformer module and ammeter module Insulation-monitoring module Remote communication by bus Device-status indication Device remote operation Transmission of settings Indication and identification of protection devices and alarms Transmission of measured current values Installation Accessories

long time Ir (In x ) short time lsd (Ir x ) instantaneous Ii (In x ) lg (In x ) ZSI add-on Vigi module combination with Vigirex relay

Dimensions (mm) W x H x D Weight (kg) (1) 2P in 3P case for type N only (2) specific trip units are available for operational voltages > 525 V (3) NS100N et U u 500 V: Ics = 50 % Icu (4) operational voltage y 500 V

terminal extensions and spreaders terminal shields and interphase barriers escutcheons fixed, front connections 2-3P / 4P fixed, front connections 3P / 4P

Source changeover system (see section on source changeover systems) Manual, remote-operated and automatic source changeover systems

20

NS125E
3, 4 b b b 125 750 8 500 E 25 16/10 10 6 50 % b A 10000 6000 6000 E 5 5 E non interchangeable 12.5 125 (A) b b b b b b b 105 x 161 x 86 1.8 / 2.3 -

NS100
2 (1), 3, 4 b b b b b b b b b 100 100 750 8 690 500 N SX 85 90 36 50 35 50 25 36 22 35 8 10 100 % (3) b A 50000 50000 30000 N 85 35 8 N 85 25 10 SX 90 50 20 SX 85 50 10

NS160
2 (1), 3, 4 b b b b b b b b b 160 150 750 8 690 500 N SX 85 90 36 50 35 50 30 36 22 35 8 10 100 % b A 40000 40000 20000 N 85 35 20 N 85 35 10 SX 90 50 20 SX 85 50 10

NS250
2 (1), 3, 4 b b b b b b b b b 250 220 750 8 690 500 N SX 85 90 36 50 35 50 30 36 22 35 8 10 100 % b A 20000 20000 10000 N 85 35 20 N 85 35 18 SX 90 50 20 SX 85 50 18

NS400
3, 4 b b b b b b b b b 400 320 750 8 690 500 N 85 50 42 30 22 10 (2) 100 % b A 15000 12000 6000 N 85 42 20 N -

NS630
3, 4 b b b b b b b b b 630 500 750 8 690 500 N H 85 100 50 70 42 65 30 50 22 35 10 (2) 20 (2) 100 % (4) b A 15000 8000 4000 N 85 42 20 N H 100 65 35 H -

H 100 70 65 50 35 10

L 150 150 130 100 100 75

H 100 70 65 50 35 10

L 150 150 130 70 50 20

H 100 70 65 50 35 10

L 150 150 130 70 50 20

H 100 70 65 50 35 20 (2)

L 150 150 130 100 100 75 (2)

L 150 150 130 70 50 35 (2)

H 100 65 35 H 85 65 10

L 200 130 50 L -

H 100 65 35 H 85 65 10

L 200 130 50 L -

H 100 65 35 H 85 65 18

L 200 130 50 L -

H 100 65 35 H -

L 200 130 50 L -

L 200 130 50 L -

TM (thermal-magnetic) b b b b b b b b b b b b b b 105 x 161 x 86 / 140 x 161 x 86 2.0 to 2.2 / 2.6 to 2.8 b

STR22 (electronic) b b b b b -

STR23 (electronic) b b b b b b b b b b

STR53 (electronic) b b b b b b b b

b b -

b b b b b 140 x 255 x 110 / 185 x 255 x 110 6.2 to 8.1 b

b b b b b

21

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems Compact NS circuit breakers from 630 up to 3200 A

Compact circuit breakers
Number of poles Control manual electric Type of circuit breaker Connections fixed front connection rear connection front connection with bare cables front connection rear connection toggle direct or extended rotary handle

PB101669-37

withdrawable (on chassis)

Compact NS800L

Compact NS2000H

Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2 Rated current (A) In 50 C 65 C (1) Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220/240 V 50/60 Hz 380/415 V 440 V 500/525 V 660/690 V Service breaking capacity (kA rms) lcs Value or % Icu manual operation electrical operation Short-time withstand current (kA rms) lcw 0.5 s V AC 50/60 Hz 1s V AC 50/60 Hz 3s Integrated instantaneous protection kA peak 10 % Suitability for isolation Utilisation category Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical electrical 440 V In/2 In 690 V In/2 In Pollution degree Electrical characteristics as per Nema AB1 Breaking capacity at 60 Hz (kA) 240 V 480 V 600 V

E45178R_68

Protection and measurements Interchangeable control units Overload protection Short-circuit protection Earth-fault protection Residual earth-leakage protection Zone selective interlocking Protection of the fourth pole Current measurements

long time Ir (In x ) short time Isd (Ir x ) instantaneous Ii (In x ) lg (In x ) In ZSI

Remote communication by bus Device-status indication Device remote operation Transmission of settings Indication and identification of protection devices and alarms Transmission of measured current values Additional indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases Installation Accessories

MX shunt release/MN undervoltage release

terminal extensions and spreaders terminal shields and interphase barriers escutcheons Dimensions fixed devices, front connections (mm) 3P HxWxD 4P Weight fixed devices, front connections (kg) 3P 4P (1) 65 C with vertical connections. See the temperature derating tables for other types of connections. (2) Ics: 100 % Icu for breaking capacity 440V/500V/660V Ics: 75 % Icu for breaking capacity 220V/380V. Source changeover system (see section on "source changeover systems") Manual, remote-operated and automatic source changeover systems

22

NS630b NS800
3, 4 b b b (except LB) N b b b b b H b b b b b L b b b b 800 800 LB b b b b

NS1000
3, 4 b b b N b b b b b H b b b b b L b b b b

NS1250
3, 4 b b b N b b b b b H b b b b b

NS1600
3, 4 b b b N b b b b 1600 1510 800 8 690 N 50 50 50 40 30 75 % 75 % 25 19.2 40 b B 10000 5000 2000 2000 1000 III N 50 35 25 H b b b b

NS1600b NS2000
3, 4 b N b 1600 1550 800 8 690 N 85 70 65 65 65 100 % (2) 100 % (2) 32 130 b B 5000 3000 2000 2000 1000 III N 85 65 50 H b 2000 1900

NS2500

NS3200

630 630 800 8 690 N H 50 70 50 70 50 65 40 50 30 42 100 % 75 % 75 % 50 % 25 25 19.2 19.2 40 40 b B B 10000 6000 6000 5000 5000 4000 4000 2000 2000 III N 50 35 25 H 65 50 50

L 150 150 130 100 25 100 % 100 % 10 7 A 4000 3000 3000 2000 L 125 100 -

1000 1000 800 8 690 LB N 200 50 200 50 200 50 100 40 75 30 100 % 100 % 75 % 7 25 5 19.2 40 b A B 10000 4000 6000 3000 5000 3000 4000 2000 2000 III LB 200 200 100 N 50 35 25

1250 1250 800 8 690 H L N 70 150 50 70 150 50 65 130 50 50 100 40 42 25 30 75 % 100 % 100 % 50 % 100 % 75 % 25 10 25 19.2 7 19.2 40 40 b B A B 10000 6000 4000 5000 5000 3000 4000 4000 3000 3000 2000 2000 2000 III H 65 50 50 L 125 100 N 50 35 25

2500 2500

3200 2970

H 70 70 65 50 42 75 % 50 % 25 19.2 40 B

H 70 70 65 50 42 50 % 50 % 25 19.2 40 B

H 125 85 85 75 % 75 % 32 130 B

H 65 50 50 Micrologic 2.0 A b b b b b b b b b b

H 65 50 50

H 125 85 Micrologic 6.0 A b b b b b b b b b b b Micrologic 7.0 A b b b b b b b b b b b

Micrologic 2.0 b b b b b b b b b b 327 x 210 x 147 327 x 280 x 147 14 18 b

Micrologic 5.0 b b b b b b -

Micrologic 5.0 A b b b b b b b b b b b b b

b b 350 x 420 x 160 350 x 535 x 160 24 36 -

23

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems TM and STR trip units for Compact NS100 to 250
DB105114

Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers, types N, SX, H and L, may be equipped with either a TM thermal-magnetic trip unit or an STR22 electronic trip unit. A mechanical mismatch-protection system avoids breaker and trip unit mismatches.

Standard protection

Protection of systems with an overloaded neutral

Protection of systems supplied by generators. Protection of long cables

TM thermal-magnetic trip units

E58564

t 1
DB105115

2 0 1 2 Ir Im

overload protection threshold short-circuit protection pick-up

Protection
The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials. Overload protection Thermal protection with an adjustable threshold. Short-circuit protection Magnetic protection with a fixed or adjustable pick-up, depending on the rating. Protection of the fourth pole On four-pole circuit breakers, the trip units can be of the: 4P 3d type (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/2 type (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d type (neutral protection at In).

TM thermal-magnetic trip units

Ratings (A) Circuit breaker In at 40 C Compact NS125 E Compact NS100 Compact NS160 Compact NS250 Ir Im Compact NS100 Compact NS160/250 4P 3d 4P 3d + N/2 4P 4d

TM16D to 250D
16 b b b b 25 b b b b 32 b b b b 40 b b b b 50 b b b b 63 b b b b 80 b b b b 100 b b b b 125 b b b 160 b b 200 b 250 b

TM16G to 63G
16 b b b b 25 b b b b 40 b b b b 63 b b b b

Overload protection (thermal)

Current setting (A) Current setting (A) adjustable from 0.8 to 1 x In adjustable from 0.8 to 1 x In

Short-circuit protection (magnetic)

fixed adjustable fixed 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 63 80 190 300 400 500 500 500 1000 1250 1250 1250 5 to 10 x In 63 80 no protection 56 1 x Ir 56 63 0.5 x Ir 1 x Ir 80 80 125 125

Protection of the fourth pole

Neutral unprotected Neutral protection at 0.5 In Neutral protection at In no protection

24

STR22 electronic trip units

DB103749

t 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Ir Isd Ii I
Ir Isd
DB103750

In=250A
Io
.8 .9 1 .7 .63 .5

STR 22 SE Ir .9 .93
.88 .85 .8

90 105

.95 .98 1

alarm %Ir

Isd

6 7 8 10

4 3 2

x In

x Io

x Ir

test

long-time threshold (overload protection) Ir long-time tripping delay short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection) Isd short-time tripping delay instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection) Ii test connector percent load indication

Protection
The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials. Overload protection True rms long-time protection with an adjustable threshold. Short-circuit protection Short-time and instantaneous protection: b short-time protection with an adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delay b instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up. Protection of the fourth pole On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch to 4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d (neutral protection at In). Protection of an overloaded neutral (OSN): For 4-pole circuit breakers, special protection of systems with high 3rd order harmonic contents. In position 4P 4d, the switch sets the neutral protection threshold to 1.6 x Ir.

E58711

4P 4d

Protection of the fourth pole

Indications
A LED on the front indicates the percent load: b ON - load is > 90 % of Ir setting b flashing - load is > 105 % of Ir setting.

Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.

STR electronic trip units

Ratings (A) Circuit breaker In 20 to 70 C (1) Compact NS100 Compact NS160 Compact NS250 Ir = In x at 1.5 x Ir at 6 x Ir at 7.2 x Ir Isd = Ir x

STR22SE
40 b b b 80 b b 100 b b b 160 b b 250 (1) b

STR22SE OSN
160 b b 0.250.63 48 settings 90...180 5...7.5 3.2...5.0 2...10 8 settings fixed y 40 y 60 fixed u 7 x In 250 (1) b

STR22GE
40 b b b 100 b b b 160 b b 250 (1) b

Overload protection (Long Time)

Current setting Time delay (s) (min.max.) 0.4...1 48 settings 90...180 5...7.5 3.2...5.0 2...10 8 settings fixed y 40 y 60 fixed u 11 x In 0.4...1 48 settings 1215 2...10 8 settings fixed y 40 y 60 fixed u 11 x In

Short-circuit protection (Short Time)

Pick-up (A) Accuracy 15 % Time delay (ms)

max. resettable time max. break time

Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous)

Pick-up (A) Ii

Protection of the fourth pole

Neutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection no protection Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d + N/2 0.5 x Ir 0.8 x Ir Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir 1.6 x Ir (1) If the STR22SE, STR22SE OSN and STR22GE 250 A trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker. The overload protection setting may not exceed 0.95 at 60 C or 0.9 at 70 C.
E25979

Setting example
What is the overload-protection threshold of a Compact NS250 circuit breaker equipped with an STR22SE 160 A trip unit set to Io = 0.5 and Ir = 0.8 ? Answer: In x Io x Ir = 160 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 64 A.

Io
.8 .9

Ir
1 .88 .85 .8 .9 .93 .95 .98 1
x Io

.7 .63 .5
x In

25

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems STR trip units for Compact NS400 to 630
DB105116

Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers, types N, H and L, 3-pole and 4-pole, may be equipped with any of the STR23SE, STR23SV, STR53UE and STR53SV electronic trip units. The STR53UE and STR53SV trip units offer a wider range of settings and the STR53UE offers a number of optional protection, measurement and communications functions.

Standard protection with selectivity Protection of systems supplied by generators. Protection of long cables

Protection of systems with an overloaded neutral Protection of systems U > 525 V

Selection of the trip unit depends on the type of distribution system protected and the operational voltage of the circuit breaker. Protection for all types of circuits, from 60 to 630 A, is possible with only five tripunit catalogue numbers, whatever the circuit-breaker operational voltage: b U y 525 V: STR23SE, STR23SE OSN or STR53UE b U > 525 V: STR23SV or STR53SV. Trip units do not have a predefined rating. The tripping threshold depends on the circuit breaker rating and the LT (long time) current setting. For example, for an STR23SE trip unit set to the maximum value, the tripping threshold is: v 250 A, when installed on a Compact NS400 250 A v 630 A, when installed on a Compact NS630.

STR23SE (U y 525 V) and STR23SV (U > 525 V) electronic trip units

6
DB103751

t
E24094

1 2 3 4 5

STR 23 SE
.8 .9

alarm

90 105 %Ir

Io

.7 .63 .5
x In

.88 .85 .8

.9 .93 .95 .98 1

x Io

Ir

5 4 3 2

Isd

6 7 8 10

x Ir

+
test

Ir

Isd

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Ir Isd

Ii

long-time threshold (overload protection) Ir long-time tripping delay short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection) Isd short-time tripping delay instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection) Ii test connector percent load indication

Protection
The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials. Overload protection Long-time protection with an adjustable threshold and fixed tripping delay: b Io base setting (6-position dial from 0.5 to 1) b Ir fine adjustment (8-position dial from 0.8 to 1). Short-circuit protection Short-time and instantaneous protection: b short-time protection with an adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delay b instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up. Protection of the fourth pole On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch to 4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d (neutral protection at In). Protection of an overloaded neutral (OSN): For 4-pole circuit breakers, special protection of systems with high 3rd order harmonic contents. In position 4P 4d, the switch sets the neutral protection threshold to 1.6 x Ir.

Indications
A LED on the front indicates the percent load: b ON - load is > 90 % of Ir setting b flashing - load is > 105 % of Ir setting.

Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.

26

STR53UE (U y 525 V) and STR53SV (U > 525 V) electronic trip units

E21004

t 1
DB100630

(1)

7 (1)

2 3 4 7 5 Ir Isd Ii I

STR 53 UE
Io
.7 .6 .5 1 .8 .9 1

%Ir

>Ir

>Isd

>Ig

test

fault

Ir
.88 .85 .8 .9 .93 .95 .98 1

Isd
3 2 1.5 4 5 6 8 10

Ii
3 2 1.5 4 6 8 10 11

Ig
.4 .3 .2 .5 .6 .7 .8 1

P > Ir > Im > Ih

A
I1 I2 I3

tr tsd Ir Isd li

x In

x Io

x Ir
.3 .3

x In

x In
.4 .4

test

tr
+

4 2 0,5

8 16

tsd (s).2
.1 16 0
on

.2 .1 0

tg (s) .3
.2 .1
on

.3 .2 .1

In

0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

long-time threshold (overload protection) long-time tripping delay short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection) short-time tripping delay instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection) optional earth-fault pick-up optional earth-fault tripping delay test connector battery and lamp test pushbutton

(s) @ 6 Ir

I2t

off

I2t

off

Protection
The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials. Overload protection Long-time protection with adjustable threshold and tripping delay: b Io base setting (6-position dial from 0.5 to 1) b Ir fine adjustment (8-position dial from 0.8 to 1). Short-circuit protection Short-time and instantaneous protection: b short-time protection with adjustable pick-up and tripping delay, with or without constant I2t b instantaneous protection with adjustable pick-up. Protection of the fourth pole On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch to 4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d (neutral protection at In).

(1) Earth-fault protection (T) (see the "Options for the STR53UE electronic trip unit" section on the following pages). With the earth-fault option (T) on the STR53UE electronic trip unit, an external neutral sensor can be installed (situation for a three-pole circuit breaker in a distribution system with a neutral). Available ratings of external neutral sensors: 150, 250, 400, 630 A.

Overload LED (%Ir)

A LED on the front indicates the percent load: b when ON, the load is > 90 % of Ir setting b when flashing, the load is > 105 % of Ir setting.

Fault indications
A LED signals the type of fault: b overload (long-time protection) or abnormal internal temperature (> Ir) b short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (> Isd) b earth fault (if earth-fault protection option installed) (> Ig) b microprocessor malfunction: v both (> Ig) and (> Isd) LEDs ON v (> Ig) LED ON (if earth-fault protection option (T) installed). Battery powered. Spare batteries are supplied in an adapter box. The LED indicating the type of fault goes OFF after approximately ten minutes to conserve battery power. The information is however stored in memory and the LED can be turned back ON by pressing the battery/LED test pushbutton. The LED automatically goes OFF and the memory is cleared when the circuit breaker is reset.

Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories. The test pushbutton tests the battery and the (%Ir), (> Ir), (> Isd) and (> Ig) LEDs.

Self monitoring
The circuit breaker trips if a microprocessor fault or an abnormal temperature is detected.

Options
Four options are available: b earth-fault protection T b ammeter I b zone selective interlocking ZSI b communications option COM. 27

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems STR trip units for Compact NS400 to 630 (cont.)
STR23SE STR23SV
150 b 250 b -

Trip units
Ratings (A) of circuit breaker Circuit breaker

U y 525V U > 525V

In 20 to 70 C (1) Compact NS400 N/H/L Compact NS630 N/H/L Ir = In x

STR23SE OSN STR53UE STR53SV

400 b 630 b 150 b 250 b 400 b 630 b

Overload protection (Long time)

Current setting Time delay (s) (min.max.) 0.4...1 adj., 48 settings fixed 90...180 5...7.5 3.2...5.0 2...10 adj., 8 settings fixed y 40 y 60 11 fixed no protection 0.5 x Ir 1 x Ir 0.250.63 adjustable, 48 settings fixed 90...180 5...7.5 3.2...5.0 2...10 adjustable, 8 settings fixed y 40 y 60 7 fixed no protection 0.8 x Ir 1.6 x Ir adjustable, 48 settings adjustable 8...15 34...50 69...100 138...200 277...400 0.4...0.5 1.5...2 3...4 6...8 12...16 0.2...0.74 1...1.4 2...2.8 4...5.5 8.2...11 1.5...10 adjustable, 8 settings adjustable, 4 settings + "constant I2t" option y 15 y 60 y 140 y 230 y 60 y 140 y 230 y 350 1.5...11 adjustable, 8 settings no protection 0.5 x Ir 1 x Ir b (standard) b (2) b (2) b (2) b (2)

at 1.5 x Ir at 6 x Ir at 7.2 Ir Isd = Ir x

Short-circuit protection (Short time)

Pick-up (A) accuracy 15 % Time delay (ms)

max. resettable time max. break time

Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)

Pick-up (A) Ii = In x

Protection of the fourth pole

Neutral unprotected Neutral protection at 0.5 In Neutral protection at In 4P 3d 4P 3d + N/2 4P 4d

Options
Indication of fault type Zone selective interlocking Communications Built-in ammeter Earth-fault protection ZSI COM I T

(1) If the trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker. The overload protection setting may not exceed 0.95 at 60 C or 0.9 at 70 C for the Compact NS400, and 0.95 at 50 C, 0.9 at 60 C or 0.85 at 70 C for the Compact NS630. (2) This option is not available for the STR53SV trip unit.
E25979

Setting example
What is the overload-protection threshold of a Compact NS400 circuit breaker equipped with an STR23SE (or STR23SV) trip unit set to Io = 0.5 and Ir = 0.8 ? Answer. In x Io x Ir = 400 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 160 A. The identical trip unit, with identical settings but installed on a Compact NS630 circuit breaker, will have an overload-protection threshold of: 630 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 250 A.

Io
.8 .9

Ir
1 .88 .85 .8 .9 .93 .95 .98 1
x Io

.7 .63 .5
x In

28

Possible combinations: bI bI+T b I + COM b I + T + COM b ZSI b ZSI + I b ZSI + I + T b ZSI + I + COM b ZSI + I + T + COM

Options for the STR53UE electronic trip unit

Earth-fault protection (T)
Type
Pick-up Accuracy 15 % Time delay "constant I2t" function Ig = In x

Residual
0.2 to 1 adjustable, 8 settings adjustable, 4 settings 60 140 230 350 y 140 y 230 y 350 y 500

max. resettable time max. break time

Ammeter (I)
A digital display continuously indicates the current of the phase with the greatest load. The value of each current (I1, I2, I3, Ineutral) may be successively displayed by pressing a scroll button. LEDs indicate the phase for which the current is displayed. Ammeter display limits: b minimum current u 0.2 x In. Lower currents are not displayed b maximum current y 10 x In.

Zone selective interlocking (ZSI)

A number of circuit breakers are interconnected one after another by a pilot wire. In the event of a short-time or earth fault: b if a given STR53UE trip unit detects the fault, it informs the upstream circuit breaker, which applies the set time delay b if the STR53UE trip unit does not detect the fault, the upstream circuit breaker trips after its shortest time delay. In this manner, the fault is cleared rapidly by the nearest circuit breaker. The thermal stresses on the circuits are minimised and time discrimination is maintained throughout the installation. The STR53UE trip unit can handle only the downstream end of a zone selective interlocking function.Consequently,the ZSI option cannot be implemented between two Compact NS circuit breakers equipped with STRE53UE trip units. The ZSI option of the STR53UE trip unit operates only with an upstream circuit breaker equipped with a Micrologic A, P or H control unit. Opto-electronic outputs Using opto-transistors, these outputs ensure total isolation between the internal circuits of the trip unit and the circuits wired by the user.

Communications option (COM)

This option transmits data to Digipact distribution monitoring and control modules. Transmitted data: b settings b phase and neutral currents (rms values) b highest current of the three phases b overload-condition alarm b cause of tripping (overload, short-circuit, etc.).

29

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems Micrologic control units for Compact NS630b to 3200
Protection
Protection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials. Overload protection True rms long-time protection. Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping. Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a different long-time rating plug. Overload protection can be cancelled using a specific LT rating plug "Off". Short-circuit protection Short-time (rms) and instantaneous protection. Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay. Neutral protection On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible. On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position switch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d + N/2) or neutral protection at Ir (4P 4d).

Micrologic 2.0 and 5.0 control units protect power circuits. Micrologic 5.0 offers time discrimination for short-circuits as well.

E46026A

Micrologic 5.0

Indications
Overload indication by alarm LED on the front; the LED goes on when the current exceeds the long-time trip threshold.

Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.

long time

2
alarm

Ir .7 .6 .5 .4

.8

x In

tr 8 (s) 4 .9 12 16 .95 2 .98 1 20 24 1 .5

@ 6 Ir

Isd 4 5 3 2.5 6 2 8 1.5 10 x Ir

setting

short time

tsd
(s)

.3 .2 .1
on

.4 .4 .3
2

Ii

instantaneous

.2 .1

I t
delay

0 off

3 2.5 2 1.5

6 8 10 x In

1 2 3 4 5 6

long-time threshold and tripping delay overload alarm (LED) short-time pick-up and tripping delay instantaneous pick-up fixing screw for long-time rating plug test connector

Note. Micrologic control units are equipped with a transparent leadseal cover as standard.

30

Protection
Long time Current setting (A) Ir = In x tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir Time setting Time delay (s) accuracy: 0 to -30 % accuracy: 0 to -20 % accuracy: 0 to -20 % Thermal memory (1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 % Instantaneous Pick-up (A) accuracy: 10 % Time delay Isd = Ir x

Micrologic 2.0
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 0.7 (1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 0.7 (2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 20 minutes before and after tripping 1 24 600 24 16.6
DB105117 DB105118

tr (s) 1.5 x Ir 6 x Ir 7.2 x Ir

1.5

2.5

10

max. resettable time: 20 ms; max break time: 50 ms

Protection
Long time Current setting (A) Ir = In x tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir Time setting Time delay (s) accuracy: 0 to -30 % accuracy: 0 to -20 % accuracy: 0 to -20 % Thermal memory (1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 % Short time Pick-up (A) accuracy: 10 % Time setting tsd (s) Time delay (ms) at 10 x Ir (I2t off or I2t on) Instantaneous Pick-up (A) accuracy: 10 % Time delay Isd = Ir x Off I2t On tsd (max. resettable time) tsd (max. break time) Ii = In x settings I2t

Micrologic 5.0
Micrologic 5.0 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 0.7 (1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 0.7 (2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 20 minutes before and after tripping 1 24 600 24 16.6

tr (s) 1.5 x Ir 6 x Ir 7.2 x Ir

1.5 0 20 80 2

2 0.1 0.1 80 140 3

2.5 0.2 0.2 140 200 4

3 0.3 0.3 230 320 6

4 0.4 0.4 350 500 8

10

10

12

15

off

max. resettable time: 20 ms; max break time: 50 ms

31

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems Micrologic A control units for Compact NS630b to 3200 (cont.)
Protection
Protection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials. Overload protection True rms long-time protection. Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping. Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a different long-time rating plug. Overload protection can be cancelled using a specific LT rating plug "Off". Short-circuit protection Short-time (rms) and instantaneous protection. Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay. Earth-fault protection Residual or source ground return earth fault protection. Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for delay. Residual earth-leakage protection (Vigi). Operation without an external power supply. q Protected against nuisance tripping. kDC-component withstand class A up to 10 A. Neutral protection On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible. On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position switch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d + N/2), neutral protection at Ir (4P 4d). Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) A ZSI terminal block may be used to interconnect a number of control units to provide total discrimination for short-time and earth-fault protection, without a delay before tripping.

Micrologic A control units protect power circuits. They also offer measurements, display, communication and current maximeters. Version 6 provides earth-fault protection, version 7 provides earthleakage protection.
E46028

Overload alarm
A yellow alarm LED goes on when the current exceeds the long-time trip threshold.

"Ammeter" measurements
Micrologic A control units measure the true (rms) value of currents. They provide continuous current measurements from 0.2 to 20 In and are accurate to within 1.5% (including the sensors). A digital LCD screen continuously displays the most heavily loaded phase (Imax) or displays the I1, I2, I3, IN, Ig,In, stored-current (maximeter) and setting values by successively pressing the navigation button. The optional external power supply makes it possible to display currents < 20% In. Below 0.05 In, measurements are not significant. Between 0.05 and 0.2 In, accuracy is to within 0.5% In + 1.5% of the reading.

Communication option
In conjunction with the COM communication option, the control unit transmits the following: b settings b all ammeter measurements b tripping causes b maximeter readings.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

long-time threshold and tripping delay overload alarm (LED) at 1,125 Ir short-time pick-up and tripping delay instantaneous pick-up earth-leakage or earth-fault pick-up and tripping delay earth-leakage or earth-fault test button long-time rating plug screw test connector lamp test, reset and battery test indication of tripping cause digital display three-phase bargraph and ammeter navigation buttons

Fault indications
LEDs indicate the type of fault: b overload (long-time protection Ir) b short-circuit (short-time Isd or instantaneous li protection) b earth fault or earth leakage (Ig or In) b internal fault (Ap). Battery power The fault indication LEDs remain on until the test/reset button is pressed. Under normal operating conditions, the battery supplying the LEDs has a service life of approximately 10 years.

Test
Note. Micrologic A control units come with a transparent lead-seal cover as standard.

A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation. For Micrologic 6.0 A and 7.0 A control units, the operation of earth-fault or earth-leakage protection can be checked by pressing the test button located above the test connector.

32

Protection
Long time Current setting (A) Ir = In x tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir Time setting Time delay (s) accuracy: 0 to -30 % accuracy: 0 to -20 % accuracy: 0 to -20 % Thermal memory (1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 % Instantaneous Pick-up (A) accuracy: 10 % Time delay Isd = Ir x

Micrologic 2.0 A
0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 0.7(1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 0.7(2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 20 minutes before and after tripping
DB105117 DB105120 DB105119 DB105118

1 24 600 24 16.6

tr (s) 1.5 x Ir 6 x Ir 7.2 x Ir

1.5

2.5

10

max resettable time: 20 ms; max break time: 50 ms

Ammeter
Continuous current measurements Display from 20 to 200 % of In accuracy: 1.5 % (including sensors) Maximeters

Micrologic 2.0 A
I2 I3 IN I1 no auxiliary source (where I > 20 % In) I1 max. I2 max. I3 max. IN max.

Protection
Long time Current setting (A) Ir = In x tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir Time setting Time delay (s) accuracy: 0 to -30 % accuracy: 0 to -20 % accuracy: 0 to -20 % Thermal memory (1) 0 to -40 % - (2) 0 to -60 % Short time Pick-up (A) accuracy: 10 % Time setting tsd (s) Time delay (ms) at 10 x Ir (I2t off or I2t on) Instantaneous Pick-up (A) accuracy: 10 % Time delay Earth fault Pick up (A) accuracy: 10 % Isd = Ir x I2t Off I2t On tsd (max. resettable time) tsd (max. break time) settings Ii = In x

Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A

Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 other ranges or disable by changing long-time rating plug 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 0.7(1) 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 0.7(2) 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 20 minutes before and after tripping 1 24 600 24 16.6

tr (s) 1.5 x Ir 6 x Ir 7.2 x Ir

1.5 0 20 80 2

2 0.1 0.1 80 140 3

2.5 0.2 0.2 140 200 4

3 0.3 0.3 230 320 6

4 0.4 0.4 350 500 8

10

10

12

15

off

max. resettable time: 20 ms ; max. break time: 50 ms Micrologic 6.0 A A B C 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.4 500 640 720 0 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 20 80 140 80 140 200 Micrologic 7.0 A 0.5 1 2 60 60 140 140 140 200 230 230 320 D 0.5 0.5 800 0.3 0.3 230 320 3 350 350 500 E 0.6 0.6 880 0.4 0.4 350 500 5 800 800 1000 F 0.7 0.7 960 G 0.8 0.8 1040 H 0.9 0.9 1120 J 1 1 1200

Ig = In x In y 400 A 400 A < In < 1250 A In u 1250 A Time setting tg (s) settings I2t Off I2t On Time delay (ms) at In or 1200 A tg (max. resettable time) (I2t off or I2t on) tg (max. break time) Residual earth leakage (Vigi) Sensitivity (A) In accuracy: 0 to -20 % Time delay t (ms) settings t (max. resettable time) t (max. break time)

10

20

30

Ammeter
Continuous current measurements Display from 20 to 200 % of In accuracy: 1.5 % (including sensors) Maximeters

Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A

I1 I2 I3 IN Ig In no auxiliary source (where I > 20 % In) I1 max I2 max I3 max IN max Ig max In max

Note. All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source. The test / reset button resets maximeters, clears the tripping indication and tests the battery.

33

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems Micrologic A control units for Compact NS630b to 3200 (cont.)
Accessories for Micrologic control units

E47477

External sensors
External sensor for earth-fault protection The sensor is used with 3P circuit breakers and the Micrologic 6.0 A control unit. It is installed on the neutral conductor for residual type earth-fault protection. The rating of the sensor (CT) must be compatible with the rating of the circuit breaker: b NS630b to NS1600 - 400/1600 CT b NS1600b to NS3200 - 1000/4000 CT. Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection The sensor is installed around the busbars (phases + neutral) to detect the zerophase sequence current required for the earth-leakage protection. Rectangular sensors are available in two sizes. Inside dimensions (mm) b 280 x 115 up to 1600 A b 470 x 160 up to 3200 A. External sensor for source ground return protection The sensor is installed around the connection of the transformer neutral point to earth and connects to the Micrologic 6.0 A control unit to provide the source ground return (SGR) protection.

External sensor (CT)

056467

External sensor for source ground return protection

Long-time rating plug

Four interchangeable plugs may be used to limit the long-time threshold setting range for higher accuracy. The time delay settings indicated on the plugs are for an overload of 6 Ir. As standard, control units are equipped with the 0.4 to 1 plug. Setting ranges
Standard Ir = In x 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 Low-setting option Ir = In x 0.4 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.8 High-setting option Ir = In x 0.80 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.90 0.92 0.95 0.98 1 Off plug No long-time protection (Ir = In for Isd setting) Important: long-time rating plugs must always be removed before carrying out insulation or dielectric withstand tests.
056412

External 24 V DC power-supply module

The external power-supply module makes it possible to use the display even if the circuit breaker is open or not supplied (for the exact conditions of use, see the "Electrical diagrams" part of this catalogue). This module powers both the control unit (100 mA) and the M2C and M6C programmable contacts (100 mA). With the Micrologic A control unit, this module makes it possible to display currents of less than 20 % In. With the Micrologic P and H, it can be used to display fault currents after tripping. Characteristics: b power supply: v 110/130, 200/240, 380/415 V AC (+10 % -15 %) v 24/30, 48/60, 100/125 V DC (+20 % -20 %) b output voltage: 24 V DC, 5 % 200 mA; towards the end of 2004, the available output current will be increased from 200 mA to 1 A b ripple < 1 % b dielectric withstand : 3.5 kV rms between input/output, for 1 minute b overvoltage category: as per IEC 60947-1 cat. 4.
PB101026_32

Battery module
025173

The battery module makes it possible to use the display even if the power supply to the Micrologic control unit is interrupted and still communicating with the supervisor. Characteristics: b battery run-time: 12 hours (approximately) b mounted on vertical backplate or symmetrical rail.

34

056429

Spare parts for Micrologic control units

Lead-seal cover for Micrologic A
A transparent, lead-seal cover controls access to the adjustment dials. When the cover is closed, it is still possible to access: b the test connector b the test button for the earth-fault and earth-leakage protection function.

Spare battery
Lead-seal cover for Micrologic A

A battery supplies power to the LEDs identifying the tripping causes. Battery service life is approximately ten years. A test button on the front of the control unit is used to check the battery condition. The battery may be replaced on site when discharged.

35

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems AC and DC single-phase and two-phase systems

Compact circuit breakers
Number of poles Control manual electric fixed withdrawable toggle direct or extended rotary handle front connection rear connection front connection rear connection

PB101047_17

Connections

Compact NS160N single-pole

Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2 Rated current (A) In 40 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage kV) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz DC Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220 V 50/60 Hz 277 V 380/415 V 440 V 500 V 525 V 660/690 V DC 250 V (1P) 500 V (2P) Service breaking capacity (kA rms) lcs % Icu Suitability for isolation Utilisation category Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical electrical 277 V In/2 In Electrical characteristics as per NEMA AB1 Breaking capacity (kA) V AC 50/60 Hz 240 V 277 V 480 V 600 V

PB101048_30

Compact NS160N two-pole Protection and measurements Type of trip units Ratings Overload protection (thermal) Short-circuit protection (magnetic)

In long time Ir threshold instantaneous lm pickup

value indicated for AC (1) real value for DC

Add-on earth-leakage protection Additional indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltages releases

add-on Vigi module combination with Vigirex relay

MX shunt release MN undervoltage release

Remote communication by bus Device status indication via communicating auxiliary contacts Installation Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders terminal shields and interphase barriers escutcheons WxHxD

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Source changeover system Interlocking systems

(1) The thresholds for TMD and TMG 1-pole and 2-pole magnetic trip units up to 63 A are indicated for AC. The real DC thresholds are indicated on the following line.

36

NS100
1 b b b 100 750 8 277 250 N 25 25 50 100 % b A 20000 20000 10000 N 25 25 2 b b b 100 750 8 690 500 N 85 25 25 18 18 8 85 85 100 % b A 20000 20000 10000 N 85 25 10

NS160
1 b b b 160 750 8 277 250 N 25 25 50 100 % b A 20000 20000 10000 N 25 25 2 b b b 160 750 8 690 500 N 85 36 35 30 22 8 85 85 100 % b A 20000 20000 10000 N 85 25 10

NS250
1 b b b 250 750 8 277 N 25 25 100 % b A 10000 10000 5000 N 25 25 built-in thermal-magnetic 160 200 250 fixed 160 200 250 fixed 850 850 850 b b b b b b b b 70 x 161 x 86 1.2 b b b 35 x 161 x 86 0.7 -

H 40 40 85 -

H 100 70 65 50 35 10 100 100

H 40 40 85 -

H 100 70 65 50 35 10 100 100

H 40 40 -

H 100 65 35

H 40 40 -

H 100 65 35

built-in thermal-magnetic 16 20 25 30 fixed 16 20 25 30 fixed 190 190 300 300 260 260 400 400 b b b b 35 x 161 x 86 0.7 -

40 40 500 700

50 50 500 700

63 63 500 700

80 80 640 800

100 100 800 1000

built-in thermal-magnetic 125 160 fixed 125 160 fixed 1000 1250 1200 1250 b b b b 35 x 161 x 86 0.7 -

b b b b b b b 70 x 161 x 86 1.2 -

37

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems 1000 V systems

053182

Compact circuit breakers

Number of poles Rating of sensors (A) Control manual electric fixed plug-in (on base) withdrawable (on chassis) Electrical characteristics Rated operational voltage (V) Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) Service breaking capacity toggle direct or extended rotary handle front connection rear connection front connection rear connection front connection rear connection AC 50/60 Hz AC 1000 V % Icu

Connections

Ue lcu lcs

1000 V Compact NS400

For ratings above 400 A, see the Masterpact catalogue.

Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2 Rated current (A) In 40 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage kV) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 1000 V Service breaking capacity lcs % Icu Suitability for isolation Short-time withstand current (kA rms) lcw 0.5 s V AC 50/60 Hz 1s Utilisation category Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical electrical 1000 V In/2 In Pollution degree Protection and measurements Interchangeable trip units Overload protection Short-circuit protection Earth-fault protection Residual earth-leakage protection Zone selective interlocking Protection of the fourth pole Add-on earth-leakage protection Current measurements Additional indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases

long time Ir (In x ) short time Isd (Ir x ) instantaneous Ii (In x ) lg (In x ) In ZSI combination with Vigirex relay

MX shunt release MN undervoltage release

Remote communication by bus Device-status indication Device remote operation Transmission of settings Indication and identification of protection devices and alarms Transmission of measured current values Installation Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders terminal shields and interphase barriers escutcheons fixed 3P 4P fixed 3P 4P

Dimensions (mm) WxHxD Weight (kg) Source changeover system Interlocking systems

38

NS400 1000V
3 150, 250, 400 b b b b consult us consult us consult us consult us consult us 1150 10 100 % 150, 250, 400 1250 8 1000 10 100 % b standardised standardised A 15000 4000 2000 III STR23SP b b b b b b b b b b b b b 480 x 140 x 110 13 consult us

For ratings above 400 A, see the Masterpact catalogue

39

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems 400 Hz applications

Tripping thresholds
The 400 Hz current settings are obtained by multiplying the 50 Hz values by the following coefficient: b K1 for thermal trip units; b K2 for magnetic trip units. On adjustable trip units, these adaptation coefficients are independent of the unit adjustment knob position. Thermal trip units The current settings are lower at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K1 < 1). Magnetic trip units The current settings are conversely higher at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K2 > 1). Adjustable trip units should be set to minimum, or use Compact circuit breakers equipped with low magnetic trip units (type G). Electronic trip units The use of electronics offers the advantage of greater operating stability when the frequency is varied. However, the devices are still subjected to frequency related temperature effects which may sometimes pose restrictions on their use. Column K1 of the table gives the maximum permissible current to be used for the current setting (knob position).

Thermal-magnetic trip units

Circuit breaker
NS100N

Trip unit
TM16G TM25G TM40G TM63G TM16D TM25D TM40D TM63D TM80D TM100D TM125D TM160D TM200D TM250D

Thermal setting K1
at 40 C 16 25 40 63 16 25 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9

Magnetic setting
63 80 80 125 240 300 500 500 650 800 1000 1250 1000 (1) 1250 (1)

K2
1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6

NS250N

(1) for TM200D and TM250D, Im must be set to its maximum

Electronic trip units Compact adaptation coefficients

Circuit breaker Trip unit Rating
Ir at 50 Hz (A at 40 C) NS100N NS250N NS400N NS630N NS400N NS630N C801N C1001N C1251N STR22SE STR22SE STR23SE STR23SE STR53SE STR53SE STR25DE STR35SE/GE STR25DE STR35SE/GE STR25DE STR35SE/GE 40...100 100...250 400 630 400 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250

Long-time
Ir maxi K1 0.4 to 1 0.4 to 0.9 0.4 to 0.8 0.4 to 0.8 0.4 to 0.8 0.4 to 0.8 0.4 to 0.75 0.4 to 0.75 0.4 to 0.75 0.4 to 0.75 0.4 to 0.75 0.4 to 0.75

Short-time
Irm at 50 Hz (A) 2 to 10 Ir 2 to 10 Ir 1.5 to 10 Ir 1.5 to 10 Ir 1.5 to 10 Ir 1.5 to 10 Ir 1.5 to 10 Ir 1.5 to 10 Ir 1.5 to 10 Ir 1.5 to 10 Ir 1.5 to 10 Ir 1.5 to 10 Ir

K2

1 1 1 1 1 1 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97

40

Breaking capacity of Compact NS and Compact circuit breakers at 400 Hz

At 440 V, 400 Hz
Circuit breaker
NS100N NS250N NS400N NS630N C801N C1001N C1251N

Breaking capacity
12 kA 4,5 kA 10 kA 10 kA 25 kA 25 kA 25 kA

E22347

R MN/MX U volt 400 Hz Connection 125 V CC

MN or MX auxiliary releases
For Compact NS100-630 For circuit breakers on 400 Hz systems, only 125 V DC rated releases can be used. The release must be supplied by the 400 Hz system via a rectifier bridge (to be selected from the table below) and an additional resistor with characteristics depending on the system voltage and the type of circuit breaker. U (V) 400 Hz
220/240 V

Rectifier
Thomson 110 BHz or General Instrument W06 or Semikron SKB at 1,2/1,3 Semikron SKB at 1,2/1,3

Additional resistor
4.2 k-5 W

380/420 V

10.7 k-10 W

Note: other models of rectifier bridges can be used if their characteristics are at least equivalent to those stated above.

For Compact C801-1251 The following auxiliary releases are designed to operate at 400 Hz. U (V) 400 Hz
MN 110/130 V MN 208/250 V MN 380/415 V MX 380/415 V

Catalogue number
44925 44926 44932 44914

For Compact NS630b-3200 The standard auxiliary releases can be used at 400 Hz, up to an ambiant temperature of 55 C.

41

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems DC systems

A complete DC offer

Compact NS direct-current (DC) circuit breakers are used to protect and control low-voltage distribution systems. They are installed in main low-voltage switchboards (MLVS) and in distribution switchboards (as incomers and outgoers). They can use all the accessories and auxiliaries for the AC ranges and are thus suitable for most DC systems and applications. For full details, please refer to the "Direct current 16 to 4000 A" catalogue.

Compact NS 16 to 630 A
The Compact NS range is designed for DC voltages from 24 to 750 V and offers: b a wide selection of models suited to the many applications: v 1, 2, 3 and 4 poles up to 160 A v 3 and 4 poles from 250 to 630 A b high breaking capacities, with three performance levels N, H and DC: v N - 50 kA in a 1-pole version, for systems y 250 V - 85 kA in a 2-pole version, for systems y 500 V v H - 85 kA in a 1-pole version, for systems y 250 V - 100 kA in a 2-pole version, for systems y 500 V v DC - 100 kA in a 3 or 4-pole version, for systems y 750 V b fewer frame sizes: just two pole pitches (35 and 45 mm) for easy integration in installation systems (enclosures, machines, etc.) b accessories for insulation and series or parallel connection of poles, suited to the particularities of DC applications b xed and withdrawable versions (3 and 4 poles, DC type). Breaking capacity Icu for 250 V per pole and L/R = 15 ms (1) (1P: 250 V, 2P: 500 V, 3P: 750 V)
DB105148

DB104461

NS250DC rating plate. (1) L/R = time constant of the distribution system (see "Direct current 16 to 4000 A" catalogue).

42

Protection of distribution systems DC systems

A complete DC offer

PB101047-15

PB101048-22

PB101055-30

NS160 DC -1P.

NS160 DC - 2P.

NS160 DC - 3P.

PB100905-40

NS630 DC - 4P.

43

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems DC systems

Selection guide for DC circuit breakers

There are three types of DC distribution systems (see the table). The operational voltage in conjunction with one of the three systems determines the number of poles taking part in current interruption.

Types of DC distribution systems

Selection of a circuit breaker depends essentially on the distribution-system parameters presented below which are used to determine the corresponding characteristics: b type of system - determines the type of product and the number of poles connected in series for each polarity b rated voltage - determines the number of series poles taking part in current interruption b nominal current - determines the rated current of the circuit-breaker b maximum short-circuit current at the point of installation - determines the breaking capacity. Isolated systems
The source has an earthed mid-point

Types of systems
Earthed systems
The source has one earthed polarity (1) Diagrams and different faults
DB105175

DB105176

Fault analysis (neglecting resistance of earth electrodes) Fault A b maximum Isc at U b only protected polarity concerned b all poles of protected polarity must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U Fault B b maximum Isc at U b if only one polarity (the positive here) is protected, all poles of protected polarity must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U b if both polarities are protected, to enable disconnection, all poles of the two polarities must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U Fault C No consequences

b maximum Isc at U/2 b only positive polarity concerned b all poles of positive polarity must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U/2 b maximum Isc at U b both polarities are concerned b all poles of the two polarities must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U

b no consequences b the fault must be indicated by an IMD (insulation-monitoring device) and cleared (standard IEC/EN 60364) b maximum Isc at U b both polarities are concerned b all poles of the two polarities must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U

Double fault Double fault not possible, A and D or C and system trips on first fault E

b same as fault A b same as fault A with the same obligations b all poles of the negative polarity must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U/2 b maximum Isc at U Double fault not possible, system trips on first fault b only positive polarity (cases A and D) or negative (C and E) concerned b all poles of each polarity must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U Fault B Double fault A and D or C and E

Most unfavourable cases Fault A and fault B (if only one polarity is protected)

Conclusion: selection of number of poles and breaking capacity

Layout of protection poles b on only one polarity (1) b identical for each polarity Number of series poles Per polarity b all on same polarity b equal Total b 1, 2 or 3 without disconnection b 2 or 4 (2) b 2, 3 or 4 with disconnection Breaking capacity b all poles of the protected polarity u Isc max. b all poles of both polarities u Isc max. at U at U b all poles of each polarity u Isc max. at U/2 Disconnection of both polarities (3) Possible by adding a pole to the non-protected b ensured polarity Creation See the selection table opposite (1) Positive or negative, depending on the polarity connected to the exposed conductive parts. (2) A 3P circuit breaker can be used if a 2P version does not exist. In this case, the central pole is not connected. (3) Circuit breaker suitable for multi-pole operation. b identical for each polarity b equal b 2 or 4 (2)

b all poles of each polarity u Isc max. at U

b ensured

44

DB105177

Protection of distribution systems DC systems

Selection guide for DC circuit breakers

Solutions depending on the distribution system and the voltage

Series connection of poles

Type of distribution system

Type Source Protected polarities Diagrams (and types of faults) Earthed One polarity (negative here) connected to earth (or exposed conductive parts) 1 (disconnection of 1P) 2 (disconnection of 2P)
DB105178 DB105179

Mid-point connected to earth 2

DB105180

Isolated Isolated polarities 2

DB105181

Selection of circuit breaker and pole connection

Compact NS
24 V y Un y 250 V
DB105182 DB105183 DB105183 DB105183

Single-pole. 250 V < Un y 500 V

DB105184

Two-pole (1).
DB105185

Two-pole (1).
DB105183

Two-pole (1).
DB105186

Two-pole (1). 500 V < Un y 750 V

DB105187

Three-pole.
DB105188

Two-pole (1).
DB105186

Four-pole.

Three-pole.

Four-pole.

Four-pole.

(1) A 3P circuit breaker can be used if a 2P version does not exist. In this case, the central pole is not connected.

45

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems DC systems

Circuit breaker characteristics

Compact circuit breaker

PB101047-14

Number of poles

Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-1/ 60947-2 and EN 60947-1 / 60947-2

Rated current at 40 C Rated insulation voltage Rated impulse withstand voltage Rated operational voltage Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity (L/R = 5 ms and L/R = 15 ms) In Ui Uimp Ue Icu (A) (V) (kV peak) (V DC) (kA rms) V DC 48-125 V (1P) (1) 250 V (1P) (1) 500 V (2P) (1) 750 V (3P) (1)

Service breaking capacity Rated making capacity Utilisation category Breaking time Suitability for isolation Pollution degree (as per IEC 60664-1) Protection against overcurrents (see trip-unit table page 48) Trip units Protection Durability (O/F cycles)

PB101048-20

Ics Icm

% Icu % Icu (ms)

Built-in Interchangeable Overloads Short-circuits Mechanical Electrical

250 V In 250 V In/2 500 V In 500 V In/2 750 V In 750 V In/2

PB101055-27

Indication and control auxiliaries

Auxiliary contacts Voltage release MX shunt release MN undervoltage release Front connection Rear connection Front connection Rear connection Front connection Rear connection Fixed 1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 2P 3P 4P

Installation and connections

Fixed
PB100905-36

Plug-in (base) Withdrawable (chassis)

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions H x W x D (mm) connected in series

Weight (kg) connected in series

Fixed

(1) Number of poles taking part in current interruption. Example. The NS100N circuit breaker exists in the following versions: - 1 pole with an Icu of 50 kA, for systems y 250 V - 2 poles with an Icu of 85 kA, for systems y 500 V; 1 pole can be used in a 250 V system.

46

Protection of distribution systems DC systems

Circuit breaker characteristics

NS100
1 100 800 8 250 N 50 50 100 % 100 % A < 10 ms b III b b b 10000 5000 10000 5000 10000 5000 10000 b b b b b 2 3/4

NS160
1 160 800 8 250 N 50 50 2 3/4

NS250 NS400 NS630

3/4 250 800 8 750 DC 100 100 100 100 3/4 400 800 8 750 DC 100 100 100 100 3/4 550 800 8 750 DC 100 100 100 100

H 85 85 -

500 N 85 85 85 -

H 100 100 100 -

750 DC 100 100 100 100

H 85 85 -

500 N 85 85 85 -

H 100 100 100 -

750 DC 100 100 100 100

b b b

b b b

b b b

b b b

b b b

b b b

b b b

b b b

b b b

b b

b b 5000 1000 2000 1000 2000 1000 2000

b b

b b b b 161 x 105 x 86 161 x 140 x 86 1.6 to 1.9 2.1 to 2.3

b b b b

b b b b

b b b b

b b b b

161 x 35 x 86 0.7 -

161 x 70 x 86 1.2 -

161 x 35 x 86 0.7 -

161 x 70 x 86 1.2 -

161 x 105 x 86 161 x 140 x 86 1.6 to 1.9 2.1 to 2.3

255 x 140 x 110 225 x 185 x 110 6.0 7.8

47

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems DC systems

Trip-unit characteristics

Depending on the version, Compact NS DC circuit breakers are equipped with: b 1P/2P: TM-D built-in thermal-magnetic trip units b 3P/4P: v up to 250 A, TM D, TM-DC or TM-G interchangeable thermal-magnetic trip units v for 400 and 630 A, MP1, MP2, MP3 built-in magnetic trip units.

Types of trip units

DB105189

Trip units for Compact NS

DB105171

TM thermal-magnetic trip unit up to 250 A

DB104537

Up to 250 A for Compact NS, protection is provided by thermal-magnetic trip units.

1 overload protection threshold. 2 short-circuit protection pick-up.

For 1 or 2 poles, trip units are built in b TM-D up to 160 A: xed thermal threshold and magnetic pick-up For 3 or 4 poles, trip units are interchangeable b TM-D up to 63 A: adjustable thermal threshold and xed magnetic pick-up b TM-DC from 80 to 250 A: adjustable thermal threshold and xed or adjustable (200 and 250 A) magnetic pick-up b TM-G, up to 63 A: adjustable thermal threshold and xed low magnetic pick-up to protect long cables.

48

Protection of distribution systems DC systems

Trip-unit characteristics

Trip units for Compact NS100 - NS160 - NS250

Single-pole and two-pole (built-in trip units)
Type of trip unit Rating Compact circuit breaker In (A) at 40 C TM-D 16 20 b b Fixed 16 20 Fixed 190 190 260 260 TM-D 16 25 b b b b 25 b 32 b 40 b 50 b 63 b 80 b 100 b 125 b 160 b

NS100N/H NS160N/H Overload protection (thermal) Tripping threshold

Ir (A) at 40 C)

25

32

40

50

63

80

100

125

160

Protection against short-circuits (magnetic) Pick-up Im (A) Compact circuit breaker NS100/160N/H Marked AC value (1) True DC value Type of trip unit Rating (A) Compact circuit breaker

300 400

300 400

500 700

500 700

500 700

640 800

800 1000

1000 1200 TM-G 16 25 b b b b - -

1250 1250

Three-pole 3P-3d and four-pole 4P-4d (interchangeable trip units)

In (A) at 40 C 32 b b 40 b b 50 b b 63 b b TM-DC 80 100 b b b b b b 125 b b 160 b b 200 b 250 b 40 b b 63 b b -

NS100DC NS160DC NS250DC Overload protection (thermal) Tripping threshold (A)

Ir (at 40 C)

Adjustable 0.8 to 1 x In

Protection against short-circuits (magnetic) Pick-up (A) Im Fixed Adjustable Fixed 190 300 400 500 500 500 63 80 80 125 Compact circuit breaker NS100/160/250DC Marked AC value (1) True DC value 260 400 550 700 700 700 800 800 1250 1250 5 to 10 x In 80 100 100 150 (1) The pick-up values for single-pole and two-pole, TMD and TMG magnetic trip units up to 63 A are marked with AC values. A correction coefficient is required to obtain the DC pick-up values indicated on the next line. The magnetic-protection pick-up values for TM-DC trip units are indicated directly in DC values.

MP magnetic trip unit for 400 and 630 A

DB104538

Above 250 A, the protection of Compact NS 400 A and 630 A circuit breakers is ensured by built-in magnetic trip units supplied mounted on the circuit breaker and offering one of three protection levels MP1, MP2 and MP3.

Compact NS400 - NS630 trip units

Three-pole 3P-3D and four-pole 4P-3d (built-in trip units)
Compact NS400DC Compact NS630DC Protection against short-circuits (magnetic) Pick-up (A) Im Type of trip unit Circuit breaker MP1 b b Adjustable 8001600 MP2 b b MP3 b

12502500

20004000

49

Functions and characteristics

Protection of distribution systems Incoming circuit breakers in final distribution

Compact circuit breakers
Number of poles Control manual (toggle, direct or extended rotary handle) electric fixed front connection rear connection withdrawable front connection rear connection

These are incoming circuit breakers, specially designed to operate upstream of Multi 9 modular circuit breakers. Features include: b reinforced breaking capacity at 380/415 V, by cascading up to 25 kA b easy installation in Pragma and Prisma G enclosures: v standard 45 mm front cut-out v circuit breaker clips onto a DIN rail v reduced depth (82.5 mm). A switch-disconnector version is also available (NSA125NA and NSA160NA).
048016

NSA160
3, 4 b b b b height 45 mm 160 500 8 500 250 E 25 16 10 5 5 50 % A b 10000 5000

Connections

Mounting on DIN rail Front-panel cut-out Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 Rated current (A) In 40 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand volt. (kV) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz DC Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity Icu AC 220 / 240 V (kA rms) 50/60 380 / 415 V Hz 440 V DC 125 V 250 V (2P) Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu Utilisation category Suitability for isolation Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical electrical (In - 440 V)

N 70 36 18 10 10 100 %

Compact NSA160

Protection Built-in thermal-magnetic trip unit Ratings In 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 Thermal overload protection Ir fixed threshold 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 Magnetic short-circuit fixed pick-up protection lm 600 600 600 600 1000 1000 1000 1250 1250 1250 Add-on earth-leakage add-on Vigi module protection combination with Vigirex relay Indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases Installation and connections Connections terminals Accessories terminal shields depth adjuster Dimensions (mm) Compact 3-poles WxHxD 4-poles Vigicompact 3-poles 4-poles Weight (kg) Compact 3-poles 4-poles Vigicompact 3-poles 4-poles Source changeover system Interlocking systems 1 OF + 1 SD MN or MX 1.5 to 70 mm2 cables b b 90 x 120 x 82.5 120 x 120 x 82.5 210 x 120 x 82.5 240 x 120 x 82.5 1.1 1.4 2.6 3.1 -

50

048018

Vigi earth-leakage protection module

The Vigi earth-leakage protection module may be installed to the right of the circuit breaker. Connections with the circuit breaker are possible to the top or bottom of the Vigi module (two versions). The connection is supplied with the Vigi module. Characteristics
Number of poles Sensitivity (A) Time delay 3, 4 0.03 / 0.3 / 1 / 3 intentional (ms) 0 60 (1) 150 (1) max. break time < 40 < 140 < 150 Rated voltage (V) 50/60 Hz 200 to 440 V Reset pushbutton Test pushbutton Protection against nuisance tripping b DC-component withstand class A (1) If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, there is no time delay, whatever the time-delay setting.

Vigicompact NSA

Auxiliaries and accessories

Available auxiliaries include: b 1 ON/OFF indication contact (OF) b 1 trip-indication contact (SD) b 1 voltage release (MN undervoltage release or MX shunt trip) b 1 extended rotary handle with door locking, directly accessible from outside the enclosure. Depth adjuster This accessory is required to align the front of Multi 9 devices when they are installed next to a Compact NSA125 or NSA160. Maximum width 324 mm (36 modules).

51

Functions and characteristics

Motor protection Overview of solutions

The circuit breakers presented here provide protection against short circuits and are suitable for isolation as defined by standard IEC 60947-2. For complete protection of the motor and its control device, overload protection may be provided by either the circuit breaker or a separate Telemecanique thermal relay. The control device may be of the direct on-line type (with or without reversing) or of the star-delta type. Combinations are governed by standard IEC 60947-4.1.
E26988

Motor protection up to 37 kW
Motor rating (kW)
Compact
046751

0.37 37
NS80

Breaking capacity (kA rms) 380/415 V

70

General circuit-breaker characteristics page 54 The Compact NS80H-MA circuit breaker is specially designed for motor protection. Accompanying trip unit A built-in MA magnetic trip unit provides short-circuit protection. page 54

Motor protection up to 250 kW

Motor rating (kW)
Compact

1.1 110
NS100 NS160/250
PB101051_13

18.5250
NS400/630

Breaking capacity (kA rms) 380/415 V

N SX H L

PB101049_12

36 50 70 150

36 50 70 150

50 70 150

General circuit-breaker characteristics page 20 Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers for motor protection are the same as those for distribution systems, but are fitted with specific motor trip units. Accompanying trip units pages 55 to 59 MA magnetic trip units provide short-circuit protection. Interchangeable ME electronic trip units provide protection against short-circuits, overloads and phase unbalance.

Motor protection up to 750 kW

Protection coordination (as defined by IEC 60947-4) Whatever the power of the motor, the coordination between the circuit breaker, contactor and relay can be of either type 1 or 2. Selection depends on operational requirements concerning continuity of service and the technical skills of servicing personnel. All type 2 Merlin Gerin/Telemecanique combinations have been tested under the conditions defined by standards and they are certified ASEFA/LOVAG. Motor rating (kW)
Compact
PB101206_20

160750
NS630b to 1600

Breaking capacity (kA rms) 380/415 V

N H L

50 70 150

General circuit-breaker characteristics page 22 Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units are the same as those for distribution systems. Accompanying control units page 30 Micrologic electronic control units may be used on all Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers. Micrologic 2.0 A and 5.0 A electronic control units provide protection against short-circuits and overloads. Micrologic 7.0 A provides the same protection functions, plus earth-leakage protection.

52

Selection of a trip unit or Micrologic control unit

P (kW) (400 V, 50 Hz) Ir (A) Compact NS80H-MA Compact NS100 NS250 0.37 1.5 MA MA STR22ME MA STR43ME 1.1 2.5 5.5 12 18.5 40 50 37 80 100 160 200 110 220 160 320 250 500 800 560 1000 750 1350
E26530

Compact NS400 NS630

Compact NS630b NS1600

Micrologic 2.0 A / 5.0 A / 7.0 A

53

Functions and characteristics

Motor protection Compact NS80H-MA

This circuit breaker is specially designed for the protection of motors rated up to 37 kW: b due to its high current-limiting capacity, it effectively protects motor starters (type-2 coordination as per IEC 60947-4, with contactors) b small size for easy installation in motor control centre (MCC) switchboards.

Compact circuit breakers

Number of poles Control manual (toggle, direct or extended rotary handle) electric fixed front connection rear connection withdrawable front connection rear connection

NS80H-MA
3 b b b 80 750 8 690 100 70 65 25 25 6 100 % A b 20000 10000 7000 100 65 10

Connections

Compact NS80 H-MA

Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 Rated current (A) In 65 C Rated insulation Ui voltage (V) Rated impulse Uimp withstand voltage (kV) Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz Ultimate breaking Icu AC 50/60 Hz 220 / 240 V capacity (kA rms) 380 / 415 V 440 V 500 V 525 V 660/690 V Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu Utilisation category Suitability for isolation Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical electrical 440 V In/2 In Electrical characteristics as per Nema AB1 Breaking capacity (kA) 240 V 480 V 600 V

046751

Protection Magnetic trip unit Rating In Instantaneous short-circuit lm protection Earth-leakage protection

built-in 1.5 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 adjustable pick-up 6 14 x In combination with Vigirex relay

50

80

Indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases Installation and connections Connections Terminal extensions and spreaders Terminal shields Interphase barriers DIN rail plate Dimensions (mm) WxHxD Weight (kg)

1 OF + 1 SD MN or MX built-in terminals b b 90 x 120 x 80 1.0

54

Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers with MA magnetic trip units

Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers, equipped with an MA magnetic trip unit with adjustable thresholds, offer: b short-circuit protection b suitability for isolation. Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers and the trip unit are supplied already assembled.
PB101049_22

General circuit-breaker characteristics MA trip units

Rating (A) at 65 C In Compact N/H/L NS100 circuit breaker NS160 NS250 H/L NS400 NS630 Pick-up NS100 NS160/250 NS400 (HMA 320) NS400 (LMA 320) NS630 H/L MAE500 Im 2.5 b 6.3 b 12.5 b 25 b b 50 b b 100 b b b 150 b b -

page 20

220 b -

320 b -

500 b

Short-circuit protection (magnetic)

setting 6...14 x In setting 9...14 x In setting 6...14 x In 5...10 x In 6...13 x In

Compact NS250H-MA

PB101051_32

Compact NS400H-MA

55

Functions and characteristics

Motor protection Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers with STR22ME electronic trip unit
Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers
See the circuit breakers for distribution systems on page 20.

Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers, equipped with an STR22ME electronic trip unit with adjustable thresholds, offer: b short-circuit protection b phase-unbalance protection b overload protection b suitability for isolation.

STR22ME electronic trip unit

Protection
Overload protection LT (long time) protection with adjustable Ir threshold, in compliance with tripping class 10 as defined by IEC 60947-4. Short-circuit protection Short-time and instantaneous protection: b short-time protection with fixed pick-up (Im = 13 x Ir) and tripping delay b instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up (15 x In). Phase-unbalance protection This function complies with the stipulations of standard IEC 60947-4.1 and trips the circuit breaker whenever a phase-current unbalance of 40 % or more occurs. The circuit-breaker opening time is between 3.5 and 6 seconds.

PB101050_33

Overload LED (%Ir)

Compact NS250 equipped with an STR22ME electronic trip unit

A LED on the front indicates the percent load: b OFF: I < 1.05 Ir b flashing: I u 1.05 Ir.

Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.

Optional SDTAM contactor tripping module

(Early-break thermal-fault signal) This module can be installed in place of the MN or MX release. It operates 300 ms before the circuit breaker trips on an overload. The SDTAM module can be used to open a contactor when an overload occurs, thereby avoiding the opening of the circuit breaker. It can also be used without a contactor to provide an overload indication on the STR22ME trip unit, thereby making it possible to differentiate between tripping on overloads and short-circuits. Characteristics b compatible with the following control voltages: v 24 to 72 V DC and 24 to 48 V AC v 110 to 240 V AC / DC b replaces the MN and MX voltage releases.

56

E26985

t 1
E94521

Ir In=50A
Ir
37.5 40 35.5 42.5 45 47.5 30 50

ImSTR 22 ME
7,2Ir 7,0s

u1,05 Ir IEC 947.4 / cl.10

3 4 5

33.5 31.5

Ir

13 Ir

test

Ir

13Ir

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

long-time threshold tripping class 10 as defined by IEC 60947-4 short-time pick-up short-time tripping delay instantaneous pick-up test connector percent load indication

STR22ME trip unit

Ratings (A) 20 to 70 C In NS100N/H/L NS160N/H/L NS250N/H/L Ir 20100 b b b 150 b b 220 b

Overload protection (Long Time)

Current setting Tripping class (IEC 60947-4) Time delay (s) (minmax.) adjustable, 10 settings 0.6...1 x In 10 fixed 120320 615 410 LED u 40 % unbalance 3.5 to 6 seconds Isd fixed 13 x Ir 20 % fixed 10 60 fixed 15 x In b

at 1.5 x Ir at 6 x Ir at 7.2 Ir

Motor-overload indication Tripping threshold Time delay

Phase-unbalance protection in compliance with IEC 60947-4.1

Short-circuit protection (Short Time)

Pick-up Accuracy Max. resettable time (ms) Max. break time

Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous)

Pick-up Ii

Options
SDTAM module

Overload protection settings (A)

rating (A) 20 25 40 50 80 100 150 220 thresholds (A) 12 12.6 13.4 15 15.7 16.7 24 25.5 27 30 31.5 33.5 48 51 54 60 63 67 90 95 101 132 140 148 14.2 17.7 28.5 35.5 57 71 107 157 15 18.7 30 37.5 60 75 113 166 16 20 32 40 64 80 120 177 17 21.2 34 42.5 68 85 127 187 18 22.5 36 45 72 90 135 198 19 23.7 38 47.5 76 95 142 209 20 25 40 50 80 100 150 220

57

Functions and characteristics

Motor protection Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers with STR43ME electronic trip unit
Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers
See the circuit breakers for distribution systems on page 20.

Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers, equipped with an STR43ME electronic trip unit with adjustable thresholds, offer: b short-circuit protection b phase-unbalance protection b overload protection b suitability for isolation.

STR43ME electronic trip unit

Protection
Overload protection True (rms) long-time protection with an adjustable threshold: b Io base setting (5 settings from 0.5 to 0.8) and Ir fine adjustment (8 settings from 0.8 to 1) b adjustable tripping delay, in compliance with tripping classes 10A, 10 and 20 as defined by IEC 60947-4. The STR43ME offers two motor-cooling time constants, associated with the motor starting class: b short cooling time constant (the same as the heating time constant), providing maximum continuity of service and satisfactory motor protection b long cooling time constant (four times the heating time constant), providing maximum motor protection. Short-circuit protection Short-time and instantaneous protection: b short-time prot This function complies with the stipulations of standard IEC 60947-4.1 and trips the circuit breaker whenever a phase-current unbalance of 40 % or more occurs. The circuit-breaker opening time is 4 seconds 10 %.

PB101052_36

Compact NS630 equipped with an STR43ME electronic trip unit

Indications: Overload LED (%Ir)

A LED on the front indicates the percent load: b OFF: I < 1.05 Ir b flashing: I u 1.05 Ir

Fault indications
LEDs indicate the type of fault that caused tripping: b overload (long-time protection) or abnormal component temperature (> Ir) b short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (> Isd) b phase unbalance (LED on the right) b microprocessor malfunction: v all four (%Ir), (> Ir), (> Isd) and (phase unbalance) LEDs ON. Battery powered. Spare batteries are supplied in an adapter box. When a fault occurs, the LED indicating the type of fault goes OFF after approximately ten minutes to conserve battery power. The information is however stored in memory and the LED can be turned back ON by pressing the battery/LED test pushbutton. The LED automatically goes OFF and the memory is cleared when the circuit breaker is reset.

Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories. The test pushbutton tests the battery and the LEDs.

Self monitoring
The circuit breaker trips if a microprocessor fault or an abnormal temperature is detected.

Options
Three options are available: b ammeter (I) b contactor tripping module (SDTAM) b communication (COM).

58

E26987

t 1 2
E32566

STR 43 ME
Io
.63 .56 .5 .71 .8

%Ir

>Ir

>Isd

test

fault

3 4 5 0 Ir Isd Ii I

Ir
.88 .85 .8 .8 .90 .93 .95 .98 1

Isd
8 7 6 9 10 11 12 13

P > Ir > Im > Ih

A
I1 I2 I3

tr tsd Ir Isd li

x In

x Io

x Ir

test

tr
+

10 10A

20 20 10 10A

Ir

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

long-time threshold tripping class short-time pick-up short-time tripping delay instantaneous pick-up test connector percent load indication

class

IEC 947-4-1

STR43ME trip unit

Ratings (A) Circuit breakers 20 to 70 C Ir NS400N/H/L NS630N/H/L Ir 120 b 200 b 320 b 500 b

Overload protection (Long Time)

Current setting Tripping class (IEC 60947-4) Time delay (s) (min. ... max.) at 1.5 x Ir at 6 x Ir at 7.2 Ir Tripping threshold Time delay Pick-up Isd Accuracy Time delay (ms) max. resettable time max. break time Pick-up Ii adjustable, 40 settings - 0.4...0.8 x In 10A, 10, 20 adjustable 144198 5.87.3 45 u 40 % unbalance 4 s 10 % adjustable, 8 settings - 6...13 x Ir 15 % fixed 10 60 fixed - 13 x Ir max. b b b b b

270357 10.913.1 7.39.1

433595 17.421.8 1215

Phase-unbalance protection in compliance with IEC 60947-4.1

Short-circuit protection (Short Time)

Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous) Other functions

Motor-overload LED Indications module

Options
Ammeter (I) SDTAM module Communication (COM)

Options for STR43ME trip unit

Possible combinations: bI b I + COM b SDTAM b SDTAM + I b SDTAM + I + COM

Ammeter (I)
A digital display continuously indicates the current of the phase with the greatest load. The value of each current I1, I2, I3 and the long-time current setting Ir may be successively displayed by pressing a scroll button. LEDs indicate the phase for which the current is displayed. Ammeter display limits b minimum current u 0.2 x In. Lower currents are not displayed b maximum current y 10 x In.

Optional SDTAM contactor tripping module

(Early-break thermal-fault signal) See the information on this optional module on page 52.

Communication (COM)
This option transmits data to Digipact distribution monitoring and control modules. Transmitted data: b settings b phase currents (rms values) b highest current of the three phases b overload-condition alarm b cause of tripping (overload, short-circuit, etc.).

59

Functions and characteristics

Protection of industrial control panels Overview of solutions

Compact NSC100
Rated current (A)
054556

Compact NS circuit breakers are specially designed to protect incoming feeders and groups of outgoing circuits on industrial control panels: b compliance with standards applicable worldwide including IEC 60947-2 and UL 508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 b overload and short-circuit protection b isolation with positive contact indication, making it possible to service machines safely by isolating them from all power sources b installation in universal and functional type enclosures b NA switch-disconnector version.
E44356

12.5100

UL 508 / IEC 60947-2 / CSA22-2

Breaking capacity (kA rms) 380/480 V

18

General circuit-breaker characteristics page 61 Compact NSC100 circuit breakers are specially designed to protect industrial control panels. Accompanying trip unit The built-in TMD thermal-magnetic trip unit provides: b overload protection (adjustable-threshold thermal device) b short-circuit protection (fixed-pick-up magnetic device). page 62

Compact NS100 to 630

Rated current (A)
Compact

12.5 12.5 ... 100 160

NS100 NS160

12.5 ... 250

NS250
PB101051_13

60... 400
NS400

250... 630
NS630

PB101049_12

push to trip

UL 508 / IEC 60947-2 / CSA22-2

IEC 60947-2

Breaking capacity (kA rms) 380/480 V

N SX H

35 50 65

35 50 65

35 50 65

42 65

42 65

General circuit-breaker characteristics page 20 Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers are designed for protection of distribution systems and are also suitable for protection of industrial control panels. Accompanying trip unit page 24 to 29 The trip units are interchangeable. Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers are equipped with TMD thermal-magnetic or STR electronic trip units. Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers are equipped exclusively with STR electronic trip units.

60

Circuit breaker NSC100N

Compact NS100N circuit breakers are specially designed to protect incoming feeders and groups of outgoing circuits on industrial control panels. The NSC100NA switch-disconnector version is also available.
054556

Compact circuit breaker

Number of poles Control manual (toggle, direct or extended rotary handle) electric fixed front connection rear connection withfront connection drawable rear connection

NSC100N
3, 4 b b b b 100 750 8 690 250 42 18 18 10 10 5 5 100 % A b 20000 10000 7000 42 18 10

Connections

Mounting on DIN rail Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 Rated current (A) In 40 C Rated insulation Ui voltage (V) Rated impulse Uimp withstand voltage (kV) Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz DC Ultimate breaking capacity Icu AC 220/240 V (kA rms) 50/60 380/415 V Hz 440 V 500 V 525 V DC 125 V 250 V (2P) Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu Utilisation category Suitability for isolation Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical electrical 440 V In/2 In Electrical characteristics as per UL 508 Breaking capacity (kA) AC 50/60 Hz 240 V 480 V 600 V

Compact NSC100N

Protection Built-in thermal-magnetic trip unit Ratings In 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 70 80 100 Instantaneous short-circuit lm fixed pick-up protection (A) 600 600 600 600 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1250 Add-on earth-leakage add-on Vigi module protection combination with Vigirex relay Indication and control auxiliaries Auxiliary contacts Early-make or early-break contact Voltage releases Installation and connections Connection built-in terminals Accessories terminal shields interphase barriers escutcheons Dimensions (mm) 3P WxHxD 4P Weight (kg) 3P 4P
054556

b b MN or MX

b b 90 x 120 x 80 120 x 120 x 80 1.0 1.3

Vigi earth-leakage protection module

The Vigi earth-leakage protection module may be installed to the right of the circuit breaker. Connections with the circuit breaker are possible to the top or bottom of the Vigi module (two versions). The connection is supplied with the Vigi module. Characteristics
Number of poles Sensitivity (A) Time delay 3, 4 0.03 / 0.3 / 1 / 3 intentional (ms) 0 60 (1) 150 (1) max. break time < 40 < 140 < 150 Rated voltage (V) 50/60 Hz 200 to 440 V Reset pushbutton Test pushbutton Protection against nuisance tripping b DC-component withstand class A (1) If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, there is no time delay, whatever the time-delay setting.

Vigicompact NSC100N

61

Functions and characteristics

Protection of industrial control panels Trip units, auxiliaries, installation enclosures

Trip-unit selection
10 16 TMD 15 25 20 32 30 40 30 48 40 63 50 70 60 80 75 100 125 160 150 205 150 220 250 320 400 500

P (hp) (480 V, 3P) Ir (A)

E58713

3 12

Compact NSC100N Compact NS100 NS250

STR22ME

Compact NS400 NS630

STR43ME / STR23SE / STR53UE

STR electronic trip units are designed for: b short-circuit protection b overload protection b phase-failure protection (STR22ME and STR43ME). TMD thermal-magnetic trip units are designed for: b short-circuit protection b overload protection. Type NA devices are switch-disconnectors which must always be protected upstream in accordance with applicable installation standards. Circuit breakers
NSC100N

trip units
TMD NA STR22ME NA TMD STR22SE/GE STR43ME NA STR23SE STR53UE

UL/CSA approvals
"Manual Motor Controller: Across the line starter & General use" "Manual Motor Controller: Across the line starter" "Manual Motor Controller: General Use"

NS100/160/250 N/SX/H

NS400/630 N/H

Auxiliaries
All auxiliaries can be added to the circuit breaker by the user: b padlocking devices (in the OFF position) b rotary handle b status-indication auxiliary contacts (ON, OFF and tripped) b shunt (MX) or undervoltage (MN) releases b early-make or early-break contacts. Rotary handle Available in direct or extended versions for mounting up to 590 mm behind front. Versions include: b black front with black handle b yellow front with red handle (for machine tools or emergency off as per IEC 204 / VDE 0013). All rotary handles can be padlocked in the OFF position. Optional door interlock, recommended for MCC panels (motor control centres). Early-make or early-break contacts These auxiliary contacts make it possible to de-energise the downstream auxiliary circuits of the control panel as well as the auxiliary circuits supplying the MN release, if applicable.
W

Installation in an enclosure
Compact circuit breakers can be installed in a metal enclosure together with other devices (contactors, motor-protection circuit breakers, LEDs, etc.) Minimum enclosure dimensions
Circuit breakers NSC100N NS100 N/SX/H NS160 N/SX/H NS250 N/SX/H NS400 N/H NS630 N/H Height (mm) 300 457 457 457 Depth (mm) 150 130 130 130 Width (mm) 200 208 208 208 -

E44458

Installation enclosure

62

UL508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 marking

The UL508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 approval is for a Manual Motor Controller (across the line starter or general use). The circuit breakers are 100 % rated.
E42651

LISTED MAN. MOTOR. CTRL. 34XL NSC100N-NA

R

UL / CSA logo

This MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMC indicated here below, or the upstream protective device interrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected by any protective device for Group fusing or Group installation. SC current rating kA 50/60 Hz Vac 240 42 480 25 600 10 Vac 115 230 460 575 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph hp ratings (A) 2 5 2 5 1 16 10 7.5 10 5 15 1.5 20 7.5 10 10 3 3 10 15 20 3 3 7.5 10 2 25 10 20 15 2 32 5 5 30 10 5 7.5 10 30 20 30 3 40 15 7.5 10 15 20 30 40 25 3 50 10 40 10 20 30 60 25 5 63 5 40 70 50 15 25 60 10 30 7.5 10 80 15 60 40 75 30 30 40 10 50 100 75 100 20 15 30 tripping current 125% 100% rated temperature rating tightening torque 75C wire size Nm lb-inch 14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu 50 5.5 12 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al

Breaking capacity

Horsepower rating

Cable cross-section and tightening torques

NSC100 device marking (circuit breaker with built-in trip unit)

E42650

LISTED MAN. MOTOR. CTRL. 34XL NS100-160-250 N/H/NA

R

UL / CSA logo

Equipped with TMD/DE or STR trip unit This MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMC indicated here below, or the upstream protective device interrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected by any protective device for Group fusing or Group installation. SC current rating kA 50/60 Hz NS100 NS160 NS250 Vac N H N H N H 240 85 85 85 85 85 85 480 25 65 65 35 65 35 600 10 10 18 10 10 18 tripping current 125% 100% rated temperature rating tightening torque Terminal kit reference 75C wire size Nm 4P lb-inch 3P 14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu 130 11.3 29242 29243 12 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al 4 AWG to 2 AWG Cu,Al 1 AWG to 350 kcmil Cu,Al 180 230 20 29259 26 29260

Breaking capacity

Cable cross-section and tightening torques

NS100 to 250 device marking (circuit breaker with interchangeable trip unit)

E42651

In=220A Ir 166 177

157 148 140 132

STR 22 ME
7,2 Ir 7,0 s

> 1,05 Ir
IEC 947.4 / cl.10

187 198

209 220
Ir

13Ir

220A 1ph 3ph hp Vac 115 15 40 230 50 75 460 50 150 575 50 200 100% rated

test

Trip-unit marking

63

Functions and characteristics

Earth-leakage protection Overview of solutions

Earth-leakage protection is obtained by: b fitting a Vigi module on the circuit breaker (Compact NS100 to 630) b installing a Micrologic 7.0 A control unit (Compact NS630b to 3200) b using a Vigirex relay and separate sensors (all Compact circuit breakers).

Circuit breakers equipped with an add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact)

Rated current (A)
Vigicompact

100 630
NSC100 N NSA160 N/E NS125 E NS100 to 250 NS400 and 630
044333

General circuit-breaker characteristics pages 20, 50 and 61 Compact NS100 to 630 and NSA160 circuit breakers are presented in the Protection of distribution systems section and the Compact NSC100 circuit breaker is presented in the Protection of industrial control panels section. Accompanying Vigi modules Earth-leakage protection is achieved by installing a Vigi module directly on the circuit-breaker terminals.

Circuit breakers equipped with a control unit offering integrated earth-leakage protection and an external rectangular sensor
Rated current (A)
Compact

054556

630 3200
NS630b to 1000 N/H/L NS1250 and 1600 N/H
PB101206_20 E45178

NS1600b to 3200

General circuit-breaker characteristics page 22 Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers are presented in the Protection of distribution systems section. Accompanying control units page 32 Micrologic 7.0 A electronic control units offer earth-leakage protection as standard.

Earth-leakage protection using a Vigirex relay

Earth-leakage relay
044322 051352

Separate toroids
059476S-27

Rectangular sensors

Compact circuit breaker + Vigirex relay combination

Vigirex relays may be used to add external earth-leakage protection to Compact NS circuit breakers. The circuit breakers must be equipped with an MN or MX voltage release. Vigirex relays are very useful when special time-delay or tripping-threshold values are required, or when there are major installation constraints (circuit breaker already installed and connected, limited space available, etc.). Vigirex-relay characteristics: b sensitivity adjustable from 30 mA to 250 mA and 9 time-delay settings (0 to 4.5 second) b closed toroids up to 630 A (30 to 300 mm in diameter), split toroids up to 250 A (46 to 110 mm in diameter) or rectangular sensors up to 3200 A b 400 Hz distribution systems. Options: b trip alarm by a fail-safe contact b pre-alarm LED and contact, etc. Compliance with standards: b IEC 60947-2, appendix M b IEC/EN 60755: general requirements for residual current operated protective devices b IEC/EN 6100-4-2 to 4-6: immunity tests b CISPR11: radio-frequency radiated and conducted emission tests b UL1053 and CSA22.2 No. 144 for RH10, RH21 and RH99 relays at supply voltages up to and including 220/240 V.

64

Add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact) for Compact NS100 to 630

Vigicompact NSA160 and NSC100 circuit breakers with earth-leakage protection
See pages 51 and 61, respectively.
044333

Vigicompact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers with earth-leakage protection

Addition of the Vigi module does not alter circuit-breaker characteristics: b compliance with standards b degree of protection, class II front-face isolation b positive contact indication b electrical characteristics b trip-unit characteristics b installation and connection modes b indication, measurement and control auxiliaries b installation and connection accessories.
Vigicompact NS250N
Dimensions and weights Dimensions 3 poles W x H x D (mm) 4 poles Weight (kg) 3 poles 4 poles NS100/160 105 x 236 x 86 140 x 236 x 86 2.5 3.2 NS250 NS400/630 135 x 355 x 110 180 x 355 x 110 8.8 10.8

2.8 3.4

E21007

310 150 60 0

avant test dilectrique enlever ce couvercle before dielectric test remove this cover

Vigi earth-leakage protection module

Compliance with standards: b IEC 60947-2, appendix B b French decree dated 14 November 1988 b IEC 60255-4 and IEC 60801-2 to 5 covering protection against nuisance tripping due to transient overvoltages, lightning strikes, switching of devices on the distribution system, electrostatic discharges, radiofrequency interference. b IEC 60755, class A, immunity to DC components up to 6 mA b VDE 664, operation down to -25 C. Remote indications Vigi modules may be equipped with an auxiliary contact (SDV) to remotely signal tripping due to an earth fault. Power supply Vigi modules are self-supplied internally by the distribution-system voltage and therefore do not require any external source. They continue to function even when supplied by only two phases.

t(ms)

vigi MH
3 1 0,3 10

T R

vigi

NS 250 200 / 440 V - 50 / 60 Hz

N 1 3 5

In(A)
2 4 6

HS 0,03 ( t = 0 )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

sensitivity setting time-delay setting (for selective earth-fault protection) lead-seal fixture for controlled access to settings test button simulating an earth-fault for regular checks on the tripping function reset button (reset required after earth-fault tripping) rating plate housing for SDV auxiliary contact

Plug-in circuit breaker The Vigi module can be installed on a plug-in base. Special accessories are required (see the section on part numbers).

Vigi module selection table

Vigi ME Vigi MH
Number of poles NS125 E NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630 3, 4 (1) b b b 3, 4 (1) b b b b -

Vigi MB
3, 4 (1) b b

Protection characteristics
Sensitivity fixed adjustable adjustable In (A) 0.3 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 - 30 Time delay Intentional fixed adjustable adjustable delay (ms) < 40 0 60 (2) 150 (2) 310 (2) 0 60 150 310 Max. breaking < 40 < 40 <140 <300 <800 < 40 < 140 < 300 < 800 time (ms) Rated voltage 200...440 200... 440 - 440...550 200...440 - 440...550 V AC 50/60 Hz (1) Vigi 3P modules may also be used on 3P circuit breakers used for single-phase or twophase protection. (2) If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, there is no time delay, whatever the time-delay setting.

Note. The Vigi module for the Compact NSA160 circuit breaker is presented on page 51.

65

Functions and characteristics

Control and isolation Overview of solutions

Masterpact NT

E94915

Masterpact NW

source coupling switch-disconnector

Masterpact NW or NT

main power distribution board for commercial applications

main power distribution board for industrial applications

y 1000 A

15 -40 kA

y 1600 A

20 -80 kA

replacement source modular subdistribution board industrial distribution board y 160 A : 15 - 25 kA y 400 A : 20 - 80 kA
automatic control panel

y 160 A

15 - 25 kA

y 400 A

source changeover system

local isolation enclosure

final distribution enclosure for commercial applications y 10 kA y 63 A y 10 kA

local isolation enclosure y 25 kA

control panel

local isolation enclosure

y 40 A y 630 A

y 5 kA

5-15 kA

y 63 A

y 125 A

M
N.B. adjacent to or built into the machine

Circuit breakerdisconnector

building utilities

building final distribution

continuous processes

manufacturing processes and individual machines

Switchdisconnector standardised symbols

Switch-disconnectors
E58880 E45179 PB101043_10 052164 086106

Masterpact
E45182

Compact NS

Interpact INS

Compact NS

Vario

056385

054361

035050

Compact NS

Interpact IN

Interpact INS

NG125

054629

Multi 9

66

Compact switch-disconnectors are used to control and isolate electrical distribution circuits. In addition to these basic functions, other functions for safety, remote control and convenience include: b earth-leakage protection b auxiliary MN/MX releases b remote operation b ammeter, etc. Compact switch-disconnectors may be interlocked with another Compact switchdisconnector or circuit breaker to constitute a source-changeover system.

86087

Compact NS250 switch-disconnector

053039

053041

Compact switch-disconnector equipped with a Vigi earthleakage module

Compact switch-disconnector equipped with a motor mechanism

044313

MN/MX voltage release

67

Functions and characteristics

Control and disconnection Compact NSA125NA and NSA160NA switch-disconnectors

Compact switch-disconnectors
Number of poles Control manual electric fixed withdrawable Built-in connectors Mounting Front-panel cutout for 1.5 to 90 mm2 cables on DIN rail 45 mm high toggle direct or extended rotary handle front connection rear connection front connection rear connection

Installation standards require upstream protection. However, due to their high-set magnetic release, Compact NSA125NA and NSA160NA switch-disconnectors are self protected.
86085

Connections

Compact NSA125NA

Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3 Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz DC Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz 220/240 V 380/415 V 440/480 V 500 V minimum (switch-disconnector alone) maximum (with protection circuit breaker upstream) 1s 3s 20 s

Short-circuit making capacity

lcm

(kA peak)

Short-time withstand current

lcw

(A rms)

Suitability for isolation Durability (C-O cycles)

mechanical electrical electrical

AC AC

690 V 440 V 250 V

AC22A AC23A AC23A

Positive contact indication Pollution degree Protection Add-on earth-leakage protection Additional indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases Installation and connection Accessories Dimensions (mm) WxHxD Weight (kg) fixed, front connection fixed, front connection 2/3P 4P 3P 4P add-on Vigi module combination with Vigirex relay

Source-changeover system (see section on "source-changeover systems") Manual source-changeover systems

68

NSA125NA
3, 4 b b b b b b 125 500 8 500 250 AC22A 125 125 125 125 2.1 330 1500 1500 580 b 10000 5000 5000 5000 b III b b 1 OF + 1 SD MN or MX terminal shields depth adjuster 90 x 120 x 82.5 120 x 120 x 80 1.1 1.4 b

NSA160NA
3, 4 b b b b b b 160 500 8 500 250 AC22A 160 160 160 160

AC23A 125 125 125 100

AC23A 160 160 160 125

69

Functions and characteristics

Control and disconnection Compact NSC100NA and NS100NA to 630NA switchdisconnectors

Compact switch-disconnectors
Number of poles Control manual electric fixed plug-in (on base) toggle direct or extended rotary handle front connection rear connection front connection rear connection front connection rear connection

Installation standards require upstream protection. However, due to their high-set magnetic release, Compact NSC100NA and NS100NA to 630NA switchdisconnectors are self protected.
86087

Connections

withdrawable (on chassis) Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3 Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz DC Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz

Compact NS100NA
DC

220/240 V 380/415 V 440/480 V (2) 500/525 V 660/690 V 250 V (1 P) 500 V (2 P in series) minimum (switch-disconnector alone) maximum (with protection circuit breaker upstream) 1s 3s 20 s

Short-circuit making capacity

lcm

(kA peak)

Short-time withstand current

lcw

(A rms)

Suitability for isolation Durability (C-O cycles)

mechanical electrical

AC DC

690 V 440 V 250 V

AC22A AC23A DC23A

Positive contact indication Pollution degree Protection Add-on earth-leakage protection Additional indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases Voltage-presence indicator Current-transformer module Ammeter module Insulation-monitoring module Remote communication by bus Device status indications (communicating auxiliary contacts) Device remote operation (communicating motor mechanism) Installation Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders terminal shields and interphase barriers escutcheons fixed, front connection 2/3P 4P fixed, front connection 3P 4P add-on Vigi module combination with Vigirex relay

MX shunt release MN undervoltage release

Dimensions (mm) WxHxD Weight (kg)

Source-changeover system (see section "on source-changeover systems") Manual source-changeover systems Remote-operated and automatic source-changeover systems

(1) 2P in 3P case (2) Suitable for 480 V NEMA

70

NSC100NA
3, 4 b b b 100 750 8 690 250 AC22A 100 100 100 100 DC22A 2.1 330 1500 1500 580 b 20000 7000 7000 7000 b III b b b b b b b b b 90 x 120 x 80 120 x 120 x 80 0.9 1.2 b (locking)

NS100NA
2 (1), 3, 4 b b b b b b b b b 100 750 8 690 500 AC22A 100 100 100 100 100 DC22A 100 100 2.6 330

NS160NA
2 (1), 3, 4 b b b b b b b b b 160 750 8 690 500 AC22A 160 160 160 160 160 DC22A 160 160 3.6 330

NS250NA
2 (1), 3, 4 b b b b b b b b b 250 750 8 690 500 AC22A 250 250 250 250 250 DC22A 250 250 4.9 330

NS400NA
3, 4 b b b b b b b b b 400 750 8 690 500 AC22A 400 400 400 400 400 DC22A 400 400 7.1 330

NS630NA
3, 4 b b b b b b b b b 630 750 8 690 500 AC22A 630 630 630 630 630 DC22A 630 630 8.5 330

AC23A 100 100 100 100 DC23A -

AC23A 100 100 100 100 100 DC23A 100 100

AC23A 160 160 160 160 160 DC23A 160 160

AC23A 250 250 250 250 250 DC23A 250 250

AC23A 400 400 400 400 400 DC23A 400 400

AC23A 630 630 630 630 630 DC23A 630 630

1800 1800 690 b 50000 50000 30000 (50000 - In/2) 30000 (50000 - In/2) b III b b b b b b b b b b b b b b 105 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 1.5 to 1.8 2.0 to 2.2 b b

2500 2500 960 b 40000 40000 20000 (40000 - In/2) 20000 (40000 - In/2) b III

3500 3500 1350 b 20000 20000 10000 (20000 - In/2) 10000 (20000 - In/2) b III

5000 5000 1930 b 15000 15000 6000 (12000 - In/2) 6000 (12000 - In/2) b III b b b b b b b b b b b b b b 140 x 255 x 110 185 x 255 x 110 5.2 6.8 b b

6000 6000 2320 b 15000 15000 4000 (8000 - In/2) 4000 (8000 - In/2) b III

71

Functions and characteristics

Control and disconnection Compact NS630bNA to NS1600NA switch-disconnectors

Compact switch-disconnectors
Number of poles Control manual electric fixed withdrawable (on chassis) Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3 Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz 220/240 V 380/415 V 440/480 V (1) 500/525 V 660/690 V toggle direct or extended rotary handle front connection rear connection front connection rear connection

Installation standards require upstream protection.

E45179

Connections

Compact NS800NA

Short-circuit making capacity Short-time withstand current

lcm lcw

(kA peak) (A rms)

0.5 s 1s 20 s

Suitability for isolation Durability (C-O cycles) Positive contact indication Pollution degree Protection Add-on earth-leakage protection

mechanical electrical

AC

440 V

AC23A/In

combination with Vigirex relay

Additional indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases

MX shunt release MN undervoltage release

Remote communication by bus Device status indications (communicating auxiliary contacts) Device remote operation (communicating motor mechanism) Installation Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders terminal shields and interphase barriers escutcheons fixed 3P 4P fixed 3P 4P

Dimensions (mm) WxHxD Weight (kg)

Source-changeover system (see section "on source-changeover systems") Manual source-changeover systems, remote-operated and automatic

(1) Suitable for 480 V NEMA.

72

NS630bNA
3, 4 b b b b b b b 630 800 8 690 AC23A 630 630 630 630 630 50 25 19.2 4 b 10000 2000 b III b b b b b b b b b 327 x 210 x 147 327 x 280 x 147 14 18 b

NS800NA
3, 4 b b b b b b b 800 800 8 690 AC23A 800 800 800 800 800 50 25 19.2 4 b 10000 2000 b III

NS1000NA
3, 4 b b b b b b b 1000 800 8 690 AC23A 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 50 25 19.2 4 b 10000 2000 b III

NS1250NA
3, 4 b b b b b b b 1250 800 8 690 AC23A 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 50 25 19.2 4 b 10000 2000 b III

NS1600NA
3, 4 b b b b b b b 1600 800 8 690 AC23A 1600 1600 1600 1600 1520 50 25 19.2 4 b 10000 1000 b III

73

Functions and characteristics

Control and disconnection Compact NS1600bNA to 3200NA switch-disconnectors

Compact switch-disconnectors
Number of poles Control manual electric fixed withdrawable (on chassis) Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3 Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz 220/240 V 380/415 V 440/480 V (1) 500/525 V 660/690 V Short-circuit making capacity lcm Short-time withstand current lcw Integrated instantaneous protection (kA peak 10 %) Suitability for isolation Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical electrical AC Positive contact indication Pollution degree Protection Add-on earth-leakage protection Additional indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases Installation Accessories Dimensions (mm) WxHxD Weight (kg) (kA peak) (A rms) 3s toggle direct or extended rotary handle front connection rear connection front connection rear connection

Installation standards require upstream protection. However, Compact NS1600b to 3200NA switch-disconnectors are selfprotected for all currents higher than 130 kA peak.

Connections

E45182

Compact NS2000NA

440 V

AC23A/In

combination with Vigirex relay

MX shunt release MN undervoltage release escutcheons fixed fixed

3P 4P 3P 4P

Source-changeover system (see section "on source-changeover systems") Manual source-changeover systems, remote-operated and automatic

(1) Suitable for 480 V NEMA.

74

NS1600bNA
3, 4 b b 1600 800 8 690 AC23A 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 135 32 130 b 6000 1000 b III b b b b b 350 x 420 x 160 350 x 535 x 160 23 36 -

NS2000NA
3, 4 b b 2000 800 8 690 AC23A 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 135 32 130 b 6000 1000 b III

NS2500NA
3, 4 b b 2500 800 8 690 AC23A 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 135 32 130 b 6000 1000 b III

NS3200NA
3, 4 b b 3200 800 8 690 AC23A 3200 3200 3200 3200 3200 135 32 130 b 6000 1000 b III

75

Functions and characteristics

Source-changeover systems Presentation

PB100843

Manual source-changeover systems

A manual source-changeover system is made up of: b 2 devices (for connecting rod systems) or 2 to 3 devices (for cable systems) b a connecting-rod or cable type mechanical interlocking system.

Remote-operated source-changeover systems

This is the most commonly employed system. No intervention by human operators is required. The switch from the normal to the replacement source is controlled electrically. A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of two or three circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors linked by: b an electrical interlocking system implemented in a number of manners b a mechanical interlocking system that protects against the consequences of an electrical malfunction and inhibits incorrect manual operation.

PB100844

Automatic source-changeover systems

An automatic controller may be added to the remote-operated source-changeover system for automatic source control according to programmable operating modes. This solution ensures optimum energy management: b switching to a replacement source depending on external requirements b management of power sources b regulation b emergency source replacement, etc. The automatic controller may be fitted with an option for communication with a supervisor.

Service sector: b hospital operating rooms b safety systems for tall buildings b computer rooms (banks, insurance companies, etc.) b lighting systems in shopping centres.
PB100945

Communication option
The communication option must not be used to control the opening or closing of source-changeover system circuit breakers. It should be used only to transmit measurement data or circuit-breaker status. The eco COM option is perfectly suited to these equipments.

Industry: b assembly lines b propulsion systems on ships b essential auxiliaries in thermal power stations...
PB100946 PB100947

Infrastructure: b port and railway installations b runway lighting systems b control systems for military installations...

76

Manual source-changeover systems

A manual source-changeover system can be installed on two to three manuallyoperated circuit breakers or switchdisconnectors. Interlocking is mechanical. Interlocks prevent connection to both sources at the same time, even momentarily.

Interlocking of two or three toggle-controlled devices

Two devices can be interlocked using this system. Two identical interlocking systems can be used to interlock three devices installed side by side, in which case one device is in the ON position and the two others are in the OFF position. The system is locked using one or two padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm). Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices There are two interlocking-system models: b Compact NS100 to 250 b Compact NS400 to 630 (can also be used for a Compact NS100 to 250). Devices must be either all fixed or all withdrawable.

Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles

E21287

The rotary handles are padlocked with the devices in the OFF position. The mechanism inhibits the two devices being closed at the same time, but does allow for both to be open (OFF) at the same time. Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices All Compact NS100 to 1600 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors with rotary handles can be interlocked. Interlocking of a Compact NS100 to 630 with a Compact NS630b to 1600 is not possible.
Interlocking of two toggle-controlled devices

Interlocking of a number of devices using keylocks (captive keys)

ON I
ON I

ON I
ON I
reset tripped

O OFF

tripped

O OFF
O OFF

reset

O OFF

Interlocking uses two identical keylocks with a single key. This solution enables interlocking between two devices that are physically distant or that have significantly different characteristics, for example between a low and a mediumvoltage device, or between Compact NS circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors. A system of wall-mounted units with captive keys makes possible a large number of combinations between many devices. Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices All Compact NS100 to 1600 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors with rotary handles or motor mechanisms can be interlocked.

E21399

Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles

Interlocking of two devices on a base plate

A base plate designed for two Compact devices can be installed horizontally or vertically on a mounting rail. Interlocking is carried out on the base plate by a mechanism located behind the devices. Access to the device controls and trip units is not blocked. Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices All manually operated Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers and switchdisconnectors can be interlocked. Devices must be fixed or plug-in versions, with or without earth-leakage protection or measurement modules.

E26766

ON

ON I

reset

O
OFF

O OFF

Interlocking with keylocks

E33943

push to trip

push to trip

Interlocking on base plates

77

Functions and characteristics

Source-changeover systems Remote-operated systems

Source-changeover system without a controller

In this case, the automatic-control system to initiate changeovers between the Normal and Replacement sources under predefined conditions must be provided by the installation designer.
PB100930-67

E32699

QR

Remote-operated source-changeover system

QN

3
053060

2 1

053058

Source-changeover system with a controller

In this case, changeovers between the Normal and Replacement sources under predefined conditions are initiated by a Merlin Gerin controller.
Auxiliary control plate Controller

E32700

0 . OFF 0 . OFF

IN LIN GER MER

N R N
Test

UN =

E79369

UR

E79368

0,5s
I /O UN = 1

UN ON / ON / OFF fault I /O fault OFF

0,5s

Test

stop

manu

test

R N

FFO

O
hsup NO h sup

FFO

O
hsup NO h sup

FFO

O
degr ahcs id

FFO

O
degr ahcs id

IN LIN GER MER

N R
UR

UN =

N
352 10

UN ON / ON / OFF fault auto I /O fault OFF I /O UN = 1

352

10

5 6

stop

manu

test
STOP

or generat

R N

FFO

O
hsup NO h sup

Coupling accessory
I
FFO

O
hsup NO h sup

FFO

O
degr ahcs id

FFO

O
degr ahcs id

This accessory may be used with the source-changeover system (with or without a controller) to facilitate connections.

352

10

352

10

Interlocking by rods

Interlocking by cables

E32701

Compact NS630b to 1600

7
A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of: 1 circuit breaker QN equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts, connected to the Normal source 2 circuit breaker QR equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts, connected to the Replacement source 3 mounting base plate with mechanical interlocking (NS100 to 630) or an interlocking system using rods or cables (NS630b to 1600) 4 electrical interlocking unit. IVE for NS100 to 630 or an electrical system provided by the installer for NS630b to 1600. Electrical interlocking system example: part no. 51156903 in the source-changeover system catalogue. Switching between sources can be automated by adding: 5 ACP auxiliary control plate 6 BA or UA controller, or an electrical system provided by the installer for NS630b to 1600. Electrical system example: part no. 51156904 and 51156904 in the sourcechangeover system catalogue. Accessory: 7 coupling accessory (downstream connection) for NS100 to 630.

78

B US

Controllers

By combining a remote-operated sourcechangeover system with an integrated BA or UA automatic controller, it is possible to automatically control source transfer according to user-selected sequences. These controllers can be used on sourcechangeover systems comprising 2 circuit breakers. For source-changeover systems comprising 3 circuit breakers, the automatic control diagram must be prepared by the installer as a complement to diagrams provided in the "electrical diagrams" section of this catalogue.

Controller
Four-position switch
Compatible circuit breaker Automatic operation Forced operation on Normal source Forced operation on Replacement source Stop (both Normal and Replacement sources OFF)

BA

UA

All Compact NS Masterpact circuit breaker b b b b b b b b b b b b b b

Automatic operation
Monitoring of the Normal source and automatic changeover Engine generator set start-up control Delayed shutdown (adjustable) of engine generator set Load shedding and reconnection of non-priority loads Changeover to Replacement source if one of the Normalsource phases is absent

Test
By opening of the P25M circuit breaker upstream of the controller By pressing the test button on the front of the controller b b b b b b b b b

Indications
053058R

Circuit-breaker status indication on the front of the controller: ON, OFF, fault trip Automatic-mode indication contact

Other functions
Selection of type of Normal source (single-phase or three-phase) Voluntary transfer to Replacement source b (e.g. energy-management commands) During peak-tariff periods (energy-management commands), forced operation on Normal source if Replacement source is not operational Additional control contact (not in controller). b Transfer to Replacement source only if contact closed (e.g. UR frequency check) Replacement-source maximum start-up time setting BA controller

b b

Options
Communications option

Power supply
053058

Control voltages (1)

220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz 440 V 60 Hz

b b b

b b b b b b

Operating thresholds
Undervoltage Phase failure Voltage presence Rated thermal current (A) Minimum load 0.35 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un b 0.5 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un voltage u 0.85 Un b 8 10 mA at 12 V

Characteristics of output contacts

UA controller

AC DC Utilisation category (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC13 AC14 AC15 DC12 DC13 Operational current (A) 24 V 8 7 5 6 8 2 48 V 8 7 5 5 2 110 V 8 6 4 4 0.6 220/240 V 8 6 4 3 250 V 0.4 380/415 V 5 440 V 4 660/690 V (1) Power supplied by the ACP auxiliary control plate. The supply voltage must be the same for the ACP plate, the IVE unit and the circuit breaker operating mechanisms. If this voltage is the same as the distribution-system voltage, the Normal and Replacement sources can be used directly for the power supply. If not, a BC-type or equivalent isolation transformer must be used.

79

Functions and characteristics

Communication Compact NS100 to 630

Communication with the circuit breaker or switch-disconnector is possible using a number of hardware solutions: b Advantys OTB Modbus interface module with built-in inputs/outputs b Power Meter units (PM500, PM800, etc.) b Micro Power Server MPS100 TCP IP/ Modbus gateway with six digital alarm inputs. These solutions are compatible with existing installations equipped with communicating contacts. The Compact NS range can take advantage of the features of the MPS100, including automatic notification of alarms via e-mail and SMS messages.
PB101038-26

Advantys OTB Modbus.

062052-28

Power Meter.
E90463-25

In addition to existing communication possibilities, new communication solutions are available for the range: b Advantys OTB Modbus interface module with 12 inputs/8 outputs built in and expandable by adding optional modules from the Twido range b Power Meter units (PM500, PM800, etc.) which can be used to set up four levels of functional units: v local display of currents, voltages, power, power factors, energy, total harmonic distortion (instantaneous and maximum THD values). The Power Meter units must be used in conjunction with a TCU measurement module, v remote display of all the above values via a local network or the internet via a Modbus/TCP IP gateway (type MPS100, EGX200, etc.). The Power Meter units must be equipped with a Modbus interface, v status indications. The Power Meter units must be equipped with IO22 alarm input/output module and the circuit breaker must be equipped with OF (on/off) and SDE (fault-trip indication) auxiliary contacts, v remote opening and closing. A motor-mechanism module must be added to the circuit breaker equipped for status indications b MPS100 TCP IP/Modbus gateway with six digital inputs to connect OF and SDE auxiliary contacts (see automatic notification on page 89). The existing solutions remain available: b communicating auxiliaries They replace the standard auxiliaries and connect directly to the Digipact bus. Three equipment levels: v communicating auxiliary contacts, comprising: - OF (on/off), SD (trip indication) and SDE (fault-trip indication) contacts - electronic module - prefabricated wiring. v communicating auxiliary contacts and motor-mechanism module, comprising: - OF (on/off), SD (trip indication) and SDE (fault-trip indication) contacts - MCH motor-mechanism module (220 V AC) (1) - electronic module - prefabricated wiring. v communicating carriage switches for the chassis, comprising: - CE / CD (connected/disconnected position) contacts - electronic module - wiring connector b SC150 interface Using the SC150 interface, it is possible to integrate a device equipped with noncommunicating auxiliaries into a supervison system. The SC150 interface is used to connect: v the auxiliary contacts on the circuit breaker (OF, SD, SDE, SDV, CD, CE) v the remote-operation system (on, off, reset) v the communication output for the STR53UE and STR43ME electronic trip units equipped with the COM option.

Software
To make use of the information provided by the communicating devices, it is necessary to use software incorporating a Modbus driver. Schneider Electric offers two solutions: the RCU utility and SMS software. RCU utility This is a set of Modbus drivers that, in conjunction with a PC, can be used to: b view device status (on/off and fault trip), b view variables: currents, voltages, power, power factors, energy, total harmonic distortion (instantaneous and maximum THD values), b remotely open and close the device. SMS (System Management Software) SMS is power-management software to control and monitor LV and MV electrical installations. The SMS family includes a number of products offering different features for all types of applications. SMS can communicate with all intelligent devices in the electrical installation including: b Power Meter and Circuit Monitor products b LV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors b Sepam units.

E91685-54

Micro Power Server MPS100.

053172-25 054481-22

Compact NS equipped with communicating auxiliary contacts and motormechanism module.

054516-10

Withdrawable Compact NS on its chassis equipped with communicating auxiliary contacts.

SC150 indication and control interface.

(1) For voltages other than 220 V AC, use a standard motor-mechanism module (noncommunicating) together with an SC150 indication and control interface.

80

Overview of functions
DB105136

ed discharg

O OFF

-2 IEC947BS CEI VDE

UTE

UNE

NEMA

0 125/16
push to trip

D TM 250 C 250A/40

-2 IEC947BS CEI VDE

UTE

UNE

NEMA

0 125/16
push to trip

D TM 250 C 250A/40

Im 10 Ir
.8 .9 9 8

5 6 7

Im 10 Ir Ir Im
1 .8 .9 9 8

5 6 7

Ir

Im

1
discharged

x 250A

x 250A

O OFF

x 250A

x 250A

O
push OFF

I
push ON

BS IEC947-2 CEI VDE UTE

UNE

NEMA

125/160
push to trip

D TM 250 250A/40C

Im 10 Ir
.8 .9 9 8

5 6 7
discharged

Ir

Im

O OFF O
push OFF

x 250A

I
push ON
BS IEC947-2 CEI VDE UTE UNE NEMA

-2 IEC947BS CEI VDE

UTE

UNE

NEMA

x 250A

push to trip

0 125/16
5 6

D TM 250 C 250A/40

125/160
push to trip

D TM 250 250A/40C

Im 10 Ir
.8 .9 9 8

Im 10 Ir
.8 .9 9 8

5 6 7

Ir

Im

1
Ir Im

x 250A

x 250A

x 250A

O
push OFF

I
push ON

x 250A

: wiring : communication bus : Modbus bus : Ethernet

Compact equipped with: Advantys OTB Modbus Device identification

Address b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b

PM500/800 + interfaces

Communicating auxiliaries

SC150

Indication of status conditions

OF (on/off) SD (trip indication) SDE (fault-trip indication) CE/CD (connected/disconnected position)

Controls
ON/OFF LED reset

Protection settings
Reading of the protection settings

Operating and maintenance aids

Measurements Currents Voltages, power, power factors, energy, THD Type of fault Operation counter

Fault readings Indications

81

Functions and characteristics

Communication Compact NS630b to 1600 COM option in Compact

For fixed circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of: b a "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts for manually operated devices; OF, SDE micro-contacts for electrically operated devices) and its kit for connection to a communicating motor-mechanism module. For withdrawable circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of: b a "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts for manually operated devices; OF, SDE micro-contacts for electrically operated devices) and its kit for connection to a communicating motor-mechanism module b a "chassis" communication module supplied separately with its set of sensors (CE, CD and CT contacts). Status indication by the COM option is independent of the circuit breaker indication contacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses. Digipact or Modbus "device" communication module This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits information on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the control unit and the communication module. Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V. Digipact or Modbus "chassis" communication module This module is independent of the control unit. The Modbus "chassis" communication module makes it possible to address the chassis and to maintain the address when the circuit breaker is in the disconnected position. Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V. Communicating motor-mechanism module A bus link is used to transmit remote ON/OFF orders to the circuit breaker. A communicating motor-mechanism module must be used. The remote-tripping function (MX or MN) is independent of the communication option. It therefore has no connectors for the "device" communication module.
DB105192

The COM option is required for integration of the circuit breaker or switchdisconnector in a supervision system. Compact uses the Digipact or Modbus communications protocol for full compatibility with the SMS PowerLogic electrical-installation management systems. An external gateway is available for communication on other networks: b Profibus b Ethernet The eco COM is limited to the transmission of metering data and does not allow the control of the circuit breaker.
056431

Digipact "device" communication module.

056401

Digipact "chassis" communication module

Communication bus

Communication bus

OF SD SDE

OF SDE

3 1

3 5

n Io

tripped

056431

Modbus "device" communication module

reset

Manually operated fixed device

0 OFF

Electrically operated fixed device

Communication bus
CCM

++
us modb

Communication bus 2
CCM

++
us modb

2
CE

CD

CE

+
CT CD

CT

4
CD CE CT OF SD SDE CD CE CT OF SDE

E45183

Modbus "chassis" communication module

3 5

Manually operated withdrawable device

1 2 3 "device" communication module "chassis" communication module OF, SD, SDE "device" sensors

Electrically operated withdrawable device

4 CE, CD and CT "chassis" sensors 5 communicating motor-mechanism module

82

Overview of functions
File

POWERLOGIC System Manager Demo Edit View Setup Control Display Reports

Tools Window Help 5 seconds

Sampling Mode : MANUAL

Time

Event

Module

Phase A-N Voltage - Harmonics Analysis 1,20 1,00 0,80

% Fundamental
Phase 1-N
Harmonics(RMS)

Fundamental: RMS: RMS-H: Peak: CF:

0,60 0,40

THD:

H1: 118.09 H2: 0.01 H3: 0.45 H4: 0.03 H5: 0.45 H6: 0.04 H7: 1.27 H8: 0.05 H9: 0.42 H10: 0.01 H11: 1.03 H12: 0.07

OK

Compact circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are compatible with the Digipact or Modbus COM option. The COM option may be used with all types of control units to: b identify the device b indicate status conditions b control the device. Depending on the different types of Micrologic (S, A) control units, the COM option also offers: b setting of the protections functions b analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and maintenance purposes

E47071

0,20 0,00 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7
Harmonics

H8

H9

H10

H11

H12

Ready

ONLINE: DEMO

No working system

9:30

Switch-disconnector with Circuit breaker with communication bus communication bus

Digipact Modbus b b b b b Digipact S A A A A S S S S A A A A S S S S Modbus S A A A A A A A A

Device identification
Address Rating Type of device Type of control unit Type of long-time rating plug b b b b b

Status indications
OF (on/off) SD (trip indication) SDE (fault-trip indication) CE/CD (connected/ disconnected position)

Controls
MX/XF ON/OFF Spring charging Reset of the mechanical indicator b b S A S A

Protections settings
Reading of protections settings A A

Operating and maintenance aids

Measurements current Fault readings type of fault A A A

Note. S = Micrologic 2.0 and 5.0 A = Micrologic with ammeter See the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection.

Eco COM The eco COM Modbus is intended to fit the circuit breaker with a module display (DMB300, DMC300).

83

Functions and characteristics

Communication Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.) Compact in a communication network

E94525

Software

Communication interface Communication bus

IN LIN GER MER SV
pulsar

RS 232C, Ethernet RS 485

JBus BBus com

com error

OK error

24V

1
N1

3
N1

Data concentrator DC150

Device

Digipact Bus Compact Compact

Modbus Bus

Devices
Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units may be connected to either a Digipact or Modbus communication bus. The information made available depends on the type of Micrologic control unit (A, P or H) and on the type of communication bus (Digipact or Modbus). Switch-disconnectors can be connected to the Digipact or Modbus communication bus. The information made available is the status of the switch-disconnector.

Communication bus Digipact bus

The Digipact bus is the internal bus of the low-voltage switchboard in which the Digipact communicating devices are installed (Compact with Digipact COM, PM150, SC150, UA150, etc.). This bus must be equipped with a DC150 data concentrator (see the Powerlogic System catalogue). Addresses Addressing is carried out by the DC150 data concentrator. Number of devices The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Digipact bus is calculated in terms of communication points. These points correspond to the amount of traffic the bus can handle. The total number of points for the various devices connected to a single bus must not exceed 100. If the required devices represent more than 100 points, add a second Digipact internal bus. Communicating device
DC150 data concentrator Micrologic + Digipact COM PM150 SC150 UA150

Number of points
4 4 4 4 4

Length of bus The maximum recommended length for the Digipact internal bus is 200 meters. Bus power source Power is supplied by the DC150 data concentrator (24 V).

84

Modbus bus
The Modbus RS 485 (RTU protocol) system is an open bus on which communicating Modbus devices (Compact with Modbus COM, Power Meter PM500, PM800, Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.) are installed. All types of PLCs and microcomputers may be connected to the bus. Addresses The Modbus parameters (address, baud rate, parity) are entered using the keypad on the Micrologic A, P or H. For a switch-disconnector, it is necessary to use the RSU (Remote Setting Utility) Micrologic utility. The software layer of the Modbus protocol can manage up to 255 addresses (1 to 255). The device communication module comprises three addresses linked to: b circuit-breaker manager b measurement manager b protection manager. The chassis communication module comprises one address linked to: b the chassis manager. The division of the system into four managers secures data exchange with the supervision system and the circuit-breaker actuators. The manager addresses are automatically derived from the circuit-breaker address @xx entered via the Micrologic control unit (the default address is 47). logic addresses
@xx @xx + 50 @xx + 200 @xx + 100 Circuit-breaker manager Chassis manager Measurement manager Protection manager (1 to 47) (51 to 97) (201 to 247) (101 to 147)

Number of devices The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Modbus bus depends on the type of device (Compact with Modbus COM, PM500, PM700, PM800, Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.), the baud rate (19200 is recommended), the volume of data exchanged and the desired response time. The RS 485 physical layer offers up to 32 connection points on the bus (1 master, 31 slaves). A fixed device requires only one connection point (communication module on the device). A drawout device uses two connection points (communication modules on the device and on the chassis). The number must never exceed 31 fixed devices or 15 drawout devices. Length of bus The maximum recommended length for the Modbus bus is 1200 meters. Bus power source A 24 V DC power supply is required (less than 20 % ripple, insulation class II).

Communication interface
The Modbus bus may be connected to the central processing device in any of three manners: b direct link to a PLC. The communication interface is not required if the PLC is equipped with a Modbus port; b direct link to a computer. The Modbus (RS 485) / Serial port (RS 232) communication interface is required; b connection to a TCP/IP (Ethernet) network. The Modbus (RS 485) / TCP/IP (Ethernet) communication interface is required.

Software
To make use of the information provided by the communicating devices, software with a Modbus driver must be used.

Micrologic utilities
This is a set of Modbus drivers that may be used with a PC to: b display the variables (I, U, P, E, etc.) with the RDU (Remote Display Utility) b read/write the settings with the RSU (Remote Setting Utility) b remotely control (ON / OFF) the device with the RCU (Remote Control Utility). These utilities are available on request.

System Manager Software (SMS)

SMS is a power management software for the control and monitoring of LV and MV electrical installations. The SMS family includes a number of products for all types of applications, from standalone systems to networked power management of multiple buildings. SMS can communicate with all intelligent devices of the electrical installation including: b Power Meter and Circuit Monitor products b LV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors b Sepam units. 85

Functions and characteristics

Communication Compact NS1600b to 3200 COM option in Compact

For fixed circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of: b a "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts). Status indication by the COM option is independent of the circuit breaker indication contacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses. Digipact or Modbus "device" communication module This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits information on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the control unit and the communication module. Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.
E59438

The COM option is required for integration of the circuit breaker or switchdisconnector in a supervision system. Compact uses the Digipact or Modbus communications protocol for full compatibility with the SMS PowerLogic electrical-installation management systems. An external gateway is available for communication on other networks: b Profibus b Ethernet
056431

Communication bus

Digipact "device" communication module.

OF SD SDE

2 1
COM module
OFF OFF

056431

Modbus "device" communication module

1 2

"Device" communication module OF, SD, SDE "device" sensors

86

Overview of functions
File

POWERLOGIC System Manager Demo Edit View Setup Control Display Reports

Tools Window Help 5 seconds

Sampling Mode : MANUAL

Time

Event

Module

Phase A-N Voltage - Harmonics Analysis 1,20 1,00 0,80

% Fundamental
Phase 1-N
Harmonics(RMS)

Fundamental: RMS: RMS-H: Peak: CF:

0,60 0,40

THD:

H1: 118.09 H2: 0.01 H3: 0.45 H4: 0.03 H5: 0.45 H6: 0.04 H7: 1.27 H8: 0.05 H9: 0.42 H10: 0.01 H11: 1.03 H12: 0.07

OK

Compact circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are compatible with the Digipact or Modbus COM option. The COM option may be used with all types of control units to: b identify the device b indicate status conditions b control the device. Depending on the different types of Micrologic (S, A) control units, the COM option also offers: b setting of the protections functions b analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and maintenance purposes Switch-disconnector with Circuit breaker with communication bus communication bus
Digipact Modbus b b b b Digipact S A A A A S S S A A A A S S S Modbus S A A A A A A A A

E47071

0,20 0,00 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7
Harmonics

H8

H9

H10

H11

H12

Ready

ONLINE: DEMO

No working system

9:30

Device identification
Address Rating Type of device Type of control unit Type of long-time rating plug b b b b

Status indications
OF (on/off) SD (trip indication) SDE (fault-trip indication)

Protections settings
Reading of protections settings

Operating and maintenance aids

Measurements current A Fault readings type of fault Note. See the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection. A A

87

Functions and characteristics

Communication Compact and the MPS100 Micro Power Server

Micro Power Server makes data collection easy for monitoring Masterpact / Compact circuit breakers
Now, more than ever, there is a need to monitor electrical distribution systems in industrial and large commercial applications. The key to managing all equipment, maximising efficiencies, reducing costs and increasing up time is having the right tools. Micro Power Server MPS100 is designed to withstand harsh electrical environments and provide a consistent flow of easy to interpret information.

The MPS100 Micro Power Server: b notifies maintenance staff when any preset alarm or trip is activated by the Micrologic trip unit, automatically sending an e-mail and/or SMS b data logs are periodically forwarded by e-mail b the e-mails are sent via an Ethernet local area network (LAN) or remotely via modem.
E90463

Micro Power Server is designed for unattended operation within the main LV switchboard
The MPS100 is a self-contained facility information server that serves as a standalone device for power system monitoring. It is used to transfer power system information via a standard web browser over an Ethernet local area network (LAN) or via modem, making it possible to view power system information on a PC with an Ethernet connection. In either capacity, the Micro Power Server functions as a web server for Micrologic trip unit and Power Meter (PM500) supervision, automatically notifying (e-mail and/or SMS) maintenance staff when any preset alarm or trip is activated in the Micrologic trip unit.

E91685-60

Benefits
MPS100 Micro Power Server.
056993

b view your main LV switchboard without installing software on your local PC, eliminating the need for a dedicated PC with specific software b Micro Power Server allows centralised monitoring, so you no longer waste precious time walking around the facility to collect data b view your main LV switchboard via a modem connection (GSM or switched network), avoiding the need for a LAN b maintenance people are automatically notified at any time, wherever they are, so you do not have to stay in front of a monitor all day long b data logs can be periodically forwarded by sending e-mails to the relevant people (maintenance, accounting, application service provider) automatically b possibility to monitor/notify six external events (limit switches, auxiliary switches...) b back-up of Micrologic trip unit settings in the memory of the MPS100, so you know where to retrieve it when necessary.

Main LV switchboard.
DB100435

Monitoring of the main LV switchboard via Web pages embedded in the MPS100 and accessible via a standard Web browser.

88

Typical architecture
056993-34

Automatic notification
Modbus I/O

MPS100 + -

Modem GSM ISP

SMS
WEB

Modem

e-mail OF SDE

Monitoring from office PC

Modbus I/O

MPS100 + -

Hub

LAN

LAN

Monitoring from home PC

Modbus I/O

MPS100 + Modem GSM Modem

DB103808

It is possible to combine the different types of architecture.

E89544-14

Supported Modbus devices

b Micrologic trip units b Power Meters (PM500, PM700, PM800, ). Maximum recommended connected devices is 10.
062052-15

Features
Power Meter PM500.

Micrologic trip unit.

Main switchboard at Plaza hotel. Air conditioning breaker tripped on ground fault Ig = 350 A. 06:37 on 10/12/2002

b access to the power system via a standard PC web browser b real-time data displayed with an intuitive and user friendly interface (dashboard) b Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP connectivity directly to the LAN or via modem (Point to Point Protocol services) b SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) client (capacity to send e-mail) b local logging of data such as energy, power, current b set-up and system configuration through MPS100 embedded HTML pages b user interface translatable in any language, factory settings in English and French b 6 inputs/2 outputs (no-volt contact) b DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) client.

E95405R

Technical characteristics
Power supply 24 V DC 15 %, consumption = 250 mA Operating temperature 0 to +50 C Rugged compact metal housing 35 x 218 x 115 mm (H x W x D) Additional information available at: http://194.2.245.4/mkt/microser.nsf User name: MPS, Password: MPS100

Part numbers
Short Message Service (SMS).
Micro Power Server MPS100 33507

89

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS80H-MA

E58516

Sealable terminal shield

Direct rotary handle

com A H-M . NS 80 Uimp 8kV 0V. Ui75 Icu (kA) pact

Ue (V) 220/240 380/415 440 500/525 660/690 250

Auxiliary contact
ON I
push to trip

100 70 65 25 6 10

cat A Icu 100% Ics =

DIN-rail plate

IEC
UTE

2 947. BS CEI UNE

VDE

push to trip

O OFF

push to trip

C2 C1 SHT z MX/ /50-60H 240V 220-

Voltage release

Sealable terminal shield

90

2
ON I
ed tripp
5...8

t rese

O OFF

Extended rotary handle

Auxiliary contact

Compact NSC100N, NSA160

Front accessory for NSC100N (45 mm standard door cutout)

E58517

Ue (V) 220/240 380/415 440 125

Ics =
UTE

. 125E p 6kV NSA V. Uim (kA) U 500 Icu 25 16 10 5

Icu
UNE

pact com

50%

CEI 947.2 IEC VDE BS

45 mm front

E58518

Sealable terminal shield

Ue (V) 220/240 380/415 440 125

Ics =
UTE

. 125E p 6kV NSA V. Uim (kA) U 500 Icu 25 16 10 5

Icu
UNE

pact com

Auxiliary contact

50%

CEI 947.2 IEC VDE BS

ON I

ed tripp
C2 C1 SHT z MX/ /50-60H 240V 220-

5...8

Voltage release

t rese

O OFF

Extended rotary handle

Sealable terminal shield

91

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N and NSA160

Installation
Compact NS80H-MA and NSC100N circuit breakers may be mounted vertically, horizontally or flat on their back without any derating of characteristics. They are designed for easy installation in the various types of switchboards of each market and country. Mounting on a DIN rail is possible using a special adapter. The NSA160 circuit breaker may be mounted exclusively on a DIN rail. These three circuit breakers are available in the fixed, front-connection version.
E43595 E43596 E43597

E59278

Installation positions

OFF

push to trip

NS80H-MA and NSC100N: mounting on backplate or mounting plate.

NS80H-MA and NSC100N: mounting on DIN rail (optional). NSA160: mounting on DIN rail (standard).

Standard 45 mm front, optional on NSC100N, standard on NSA160.

Front connection of bare cables

Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N and NSA160 circuit breakers are equipped as standard with connectors for bare copper or aluminium cables from 1.5 to 70 mm2. Distribution connector This connector screws directly to the standard connectors. It is used to connect up to three cables: b flexible cables from 1 to 10 mm2 b rigid cables from 1.5 to 16 mm2 b with crimped or self-crimping ferrules from 1.5 to 4 mm2.
E39432

E54455

Distribution connector

Insulation of live parts

Terminal shields Insulating accessories used for protection against direct contact with power circuits (degree of protection IP40, IK07). They are supplied with sealing accessories. For voltages u 500 V, terminal shields are mandatory.
E58553

Terminal shields

92

044314

Indication contacts
A single type of contact, complying with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation, provides different indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. b OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts b SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v an overload v a short-circuit v an earth-leakage fault (Compact NSC100N and NSA160) v operation of a voltage release. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. b SDV (earth-leakage fault indication) - inserted in the Vigi module on Compact NSC100N and NSA160 devices, it indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an earth fault. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. All the above auxiliary contacts are also available in low-level versions capable of switching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits). Characteristics Contacts
Rated thermal current (A) Minimum load Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) Operational 24 V current (A) 48 V 110 V 220/240 V 250 V 380/440 V 480 V 660/690 V

Indication contacts Common-point changeover contacts provide remote circuitbreaker status information. They can be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.

Standard
6 100 mA at 24 V AC12 AC15 DC12 6 6 6 6 6 2.5 6 5 0.6 6 4 0.3 6 2 6 1.5 6 0.1 -

Low level
5 1 mA at 4 V DC AC12 AC15 DC12 5 3 5 5 3 2.5 5 2.5 0.6 5 2 5 0.3 5 1.5 5 1 -

DC14 1 0.2 0.05 0.03 -

DC14 1 0.2 0.05 0.03 -

054550

Remote tripping
MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker. MN undervoltage release This release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a tripping threshold: b tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage b circuit breaker closing is possible only if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated voltage. Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard IEC 60947-2. Time-delay unit for an MN release (Compact NS80H-MA) Eliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting y 200 ms: It is used in conjunction with: b a 250 V DC MN release, control voltage 220/240 V AC b a 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC. MX shunt release Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un. Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 20 ms) or maintained. Operation When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must be reset locally. MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing. In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary, is not possible. Mechanical characteristics b endurance is equal to 50 % of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker b the releases clip in behind the front cover b connection using wires up to 1.5 mm2 to integrated terminal blocks. Electrical characteristics b consumption: v pick-up (MX): < 5 VA v seal-in (MN): < 5 VA b response time: < 50 ms.

MX or MN voltage release

93

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N and NSA160 (cont.)
Rotary handles
There are two types of rotary handle: b direct rotary handle b extended rotary handle. There are two models: b standard with a black handle b VDE with a red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control. Direct rotary handle (NS80H-MA and NSC100N) Degree of protection IP40, IK07. The direct rotary handle maintains: b visibility of and access to trip unit settings b suitability for isolation b indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped b access to the push to trip button b circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks, shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied). It replaces the circuit-breaker front cover. Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations: b motor control centre (MCC) switchboards: v door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON v circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open b a higher degree of protection (IP43, IK07) b machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E03.81.501, IP54, IK08. Extended rotary handle Degree of protection IP55, IK08. This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of switchboards, from the switchboard front. It maintains: b suitability for isolation b indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped b access to trip unit settings, when the switchboard door is open b circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks, shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied). The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked. The extended rotary handle is made up of: b a unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws) b an assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally b an extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance (min/max distance between back of circuit breaker and door is 185/600 mm).

054558

Compact NS80H-MA with a direct rotary handle

054563

Compact NS80H-MA with an extended rotary handle

94

Locking systems
Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2. Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).
E58552

Toggle locking using a removable device

Outgoing-circuit identification
Compact NS80H-MA and NSC100N devices come with clip-in labels for handwritten indications. It is also possible to use pre-printed Telemecanique labels (part number AB1-** (8 digits)).
E18595

P D E P. P O M
Identification accessories

.P DE P
push to trip

95

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version)

DB105106

Rear insulating screens Sealable terminal shield

avant test dilec trique enlev

220/6

Voltage-presence indicator

Rear connectors

Connectors terminal extensions and spreaders

One-piece spreader

Interphase barriers
2
d
com

NS2
Ui U 220 /24 0 380 /41 5 ca Ics =
IEC 947-2

O N

Uim Icu 1 5 0 1 5 0

1
a m

O
p

I
p

com

. Ui 750V U e 220/ 240 380/ 415 440 500/ Ics=1 ca

NB250N

comp

H
Ic u 1 0 0 7 0 6

O N

NS2
Ui U 220 /24 0 380 /41 5 ca Ics =
IEC 947-2

Uim Icu 1 5 0 1 5 0

r
p u s

0
com

47-2 IEC9 VDE

UTE

NS2
p u s

1
5 6 9 7

T M

I I
. .

10

Ui U 220 /24 0 380 /41 5 ca Ics =

IEC 947-2

Uim Icu 1 5 0 1 5 0

r
p u s

Direct rotary handle

O N

Motor-mechanism module

x 250A

x 250A

Auxiliary contact
t

Extended rotary handle

Voltage release
STR
90 %Ir 105
4 3 5 6 8 2 1.5 xIr 10

22 SE
5 6 8

test

Im Ir
.85 .8 .7 .63 Ir Im xIn 1 .9 .95 .98 3 4

alarm
2 1.5 xIr 10

STR
90 %Ir 105

22 SE
test

Im
4 5 6 8 6 8 2 1.5 xIr 10 Ir Im 2 1.5 xIr 10

alarm

Im
4 3 5

8 4 0 1

Trip units
Im
4 3 8 2 1.5 xIr 10 5 6

STR
90 %Ir 105 alarm

22 SE
test

In=25

0A
Ir Im

ava nt test dil ect

Ammeter module
v
N
20
-

3 5 6 0 1 I
5

v
6 2 4

3 1 0

0,

Current-transformer module

Insulation-monitoring module

Rear insulating screens

Sealable terminal shield

96

Compact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and withdrawable versions)

DB105105

Plug-in base sealable terminal shield

Interphase barriers

Crimp lugs

Crimp lugs

Connectors

Terminal extensions and spreaders

Connectors Terminal extensions and spreaders

Plug-in base shield adapter

Connected / disconnected contacts Plug-in base

Manual auxiliary connector

Sealable terminal shield

Drawout control wires Chassis side plate Plug-in base shield adapter Control-wire connection plate Power connections

Voltage-presence indicator

Vigicompact power connections

pact com H

Interphase barriers

50N NB2 . Uimp 8kV. Icu Ui 750V (kA) Ue 100 (V) 40 70 220/2 15 65 380/4 50 440 25 10 500/5 90 85 660/6 250 Icu 00% Ics=1 cat A
47-2 IEC9 BS CEI VDE
UTE UNE NEMA

160 125/
push to trip

D TM 250 40C 250A/

Im 10 Ir
.8 .9 9 8

5 6 7

Ir

Im

x 250A

x 250A

Circuit-breaker side plate

Plug-in base sealable terminal shield

Circuit-breaker side plate

Sealable terminal shield

These withdrawable circuit breakers can be equipped with the same rotary handles, motor mechanisms and measurement and indication modules as the fixed versions. 97

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS100 to 630

Installation
Fixed circuit breakers
Compact circuit breakers may be mounted vertically, horizontally or flat on their back without any derating of characteristics. They are designed for easy installation in the various types of switchboards of each market and country.

045345

E58529

Fixed Compact NS250H

E59278

Installation positions

Mounting on a backplate (solid or slotted)

E58530

Mounting on rails

Mounting on DIN rail (with adapter)

E18850

Mounting on a Prisma functional mounting plate.

Circuit breaker on a plug-in base

The plug-in configuration makes it possible to: b extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit breaker without having to touch connections b allow for the addition of future circuits at a later date.
041632

E21017

E21018

Mounting on a backplate

Mounting through a front panel

E21019

Mounting on rails

Compact NS250H on a plug-in base

Installation positions

Protection against direct contacts with power circuits b circuit breaker plugged in = IP4 b circuit breaker removed = IP2 b circuit breaker removed, base equipped with shutters = IP4 Parts of a plug-in configuration b Compact circuit breaker b set of power connectors added to the circuit breaker b plug-in base for mounting on a backplate or on rails b insulating screen, for use when the circuit breaker is installed on a backplate with front connections b safety trip, installed on the circuit breaker, that causes automatic tripping if the circuit breaker is ON, before engaging or withdrawing it. The safety trip does not prevent circuit breaker operation, even when it has been removed. b mandatory short terminal shields. Accessories Insulating accessories can be used to: b protect against direct contact b increase insulation between phases.

E59279

98

E58714

b disconnected position - the power circuits are disconnected, but the circuit breaker is still on the chassis and may still be operated (ON, OFF, push-to-trip). b the circuit breaker may be locked using 1 to 3 padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm), to prevent connection. b the auxiliaries can be tested (with manual auxiliary connector).
041879

Circuit breaker on a withdrawable chassis

E21282

Connected

Disconnected

Removed

The chassis is made up of two side plates installed on the base and two other plates mounted on the circuit breaker. Accessories b auxiliary contacts for installation on the fixed part, indicating the connected and disconnected positions b toggle collar for circuit breakers with a toggle mounted through a front panel, intended to maintain the degree of protection whatever the position of the circuit breaker (supplied with a toggle extension) b keylock which, depending on the bolt fitted, can be used to: v prevent insertion for connection v lock the circuit breaker in the connected or disconnected positions. b telescopic shaft for extended rotary handles.

Compact NS250H on a withdrawable chassis

E59279

Installation positions

Front and rear connections

Fixed, plug-in and withdrawable Compact devices may all be equipped with front and rear connections. Fixed device

E58733

Front connection

Rear connection

Plug-in and withdrawable devices

E58716

E58717

Front connection

E58718

Rear connection

E58719

Rear connection through a backplate

99

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)

Connection of fixed devices
Front connection of bars or cables with lugs
The Compact NS100 to NS630 devices are equipped as standard with terminals comprising snap-in nuts with screws (M8 for NS100 to 250, M10 for NS400 to 630) for direct connection to insulated bars or cables with lugs. Additional terminal extensions (right-angle, edgewise, spreaders) are available for all connection requirements. Spreaders (52.5 or 70 mm pitch) may be fitted on the Compact NS400 to 630. Lugs Lugs are different for copper and aluminium cables. They are supplied with interphase barriers and are compatible with the long terminal shields. b the small lugs for copper cables may be used for cables with the following cross-sectional areas: v 120, 150 or 185 mm2 (NS100 to 250) v 240 or 300 mm2 (NS400 to 630). Crimping by hexagonal barrels or punching. b the small lugs for aluminium cables may be used for cables with the following cross-sectional areas: v 150 or 185 mm2 (NS100 to 250) v 240 or 300 mm2 (NS400 to 630). Crimping by hexagonal barrels. Spreaders Spreaders increase the pitch of the terminals. They are not compatible with terminal shields on the Compact NS100 to 250. The one-piece spreader increases the pitch, thus making it possible to use the connection accessories of a larger device (e.g. a Compact NS100 to 250 can be fitted with the accessories of a Compact NS400 to 630). The one-piece spreader also provides protection against direct contact (see page 103).

E54456

E58531

E58534

Right-angle terminal extensions

E58535

Straight terminal extensions for NS100 to 250

E58536

E58720

Edgewise terminal extensions for NS400 to 630

E58537

Small lug for copper cables

E58532

E58538

Small lug for aluminium cables

E58539

Spreaders

E58533

E58721

One-piece spreader

100

E54457

Bare-cable connectors for Compact NS devices may be used for both copper and aluminium cables. 1-cable connectors for Compact NS100 to 250 The connectors snap directly on to the device terminals or clip onto right-angle and straight terminal extensions as well as spreaders. 1-cable and 2-cable connectors for Compact NS400 to 630 The connectors are screwed to device terminals or right-angle terminal extensions. Distribution connectors for Compact NS100 to 250 These connectors are screwed directly to device terminals. Interphase barriers are supplied with distribution connectors, but may be replaced by long terminal shields. Each connector can receive six cables with cross-sectional areas ranging from 1.5 to 35 mm2 each. Polybloc distribution block for Compact NS100 to 630 The Polybloc connects directly to the device terminals and is used to connect up to six or nine flexible or rigid cables with cross-sectional areas not exceeding 10 mm2, to each pole. Connection is made to spring terminals without screws.

E54468

Front connection of bare cables

1-cable connector for NS100 to 250

E54469

E58540

1-cable connector for NS400 to 630

E54470

2-cable connector for NS400 to 630

E54471

E58722

Distribution connector for NS100 to 250

E54472

Polybloc distribution block for NS100 to 250

E54456

Rear connections for bars or cables with lugs are available in two lengths. Bars may be positioned flat, on edge or at 45 angles depending on how the rear connections are positioned. The rear connections are simply fitted to the device connection terminals. All combinations of rear connection lengths and positions are possible on a given device. The device is mounted on a backplate. For the connection of cables without lugs, the 1-cable connectors for Compact NS100 to 250 may be simply clipped onto the rear connections.

E58724

Rear connection

E58723

Two lengths

E58725

Four positions

E58726

Connection of bare cables to NS100 to 250.

101

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)

Connection of plug-in devices
Connection of bars or cables with lugs
The plug-in base is equipped with terminals which, depending on their orientation, serve for front and rear connection. For rear connection of a base mounted on a backplate, the terminals must be replaced by insulated, long right-angle terminal extensions. For Compact NS630 devices, connection most often requires the 52.5 or 70 mm pitch spreaders. Connection accessories See the Connection of fixed devices section.

E54456

E58717

E58727

Front connection

Front connection with spreaders

E58718

Rear connection

E58719

Rear connection of a base mounted on a backplate

E54457

Connection of bare cables

All terminals may be equipped with bare-cable connectors. See the Connection of fixed devices section.

DB105158

Plug-in base for Compact NS100 to 250 equipped with 1-cable connectors

E58729

Plug-in base for Compact NS400 to 630 equipped with 2-cable connectors

102

056384

One-piece spreader
Connection of large cables may require an increase in the distance between the device terminals. The onepiece spreader is an accessory that can also be fitted on Interpact INS switch-disconnectors. It offers the following features: b increases the pitch of the circuit-breaker terminals to correspond to that of the next largest frame size b compatible with all the connection accessories available for the next largest frame size (connectors, terminal extensions, etc.) b enhances insulation between phases in comparison with standard spreaders. NS100 to 250 NS400 to 630
Pitch without spreaders (mm) Pitch with standard spreaders (mm) Pitch with one-piece spreader (mm) 35 45 45 45 52.5 or 70 E58730

One-piece spreader

Mounting
When equipped with a one-piece spreader, Compact NS circuit breakers may be installed either at the back of a switchboard or on the front panel with a raiser. b devices with different frame sizes can thus be aligned in the switchboard b the same mounting plate can be used for all devices (including Interpact INS switch-disconnectors).

E58731

E58732

Connection and insulation accessories are identical to those for Interpact INS switch-disconnectors

Mounting at the back of a switchboard

Mounting behind the front panel with a raiser

103

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)

Insulation of live parts
Terminal shields
Terminal shields are sealable insulating accessories used for protection against direct contact with power circuits (degree of protection IP40, IK07). They are supplied with sealing accessories. Terminal-shield selection b fixed circuit breaker, front connection - long terminal shields b fixed circuit breaker, rear connection - short terminal shields b for voltages u 500 V, terminal shields are mandatory b for voltages > 600 V, special connection kit with terminal shields and insulating screens b for Compact NS400 to 630 with spreaders, special terminal shields for spreaders b for withdrawable circuit breaker (plug-in and chassis type), short terminal shields on the device are mandatory. Terminal shields on the base are possible. Long terminal shields for plug-in bases are used to: b protect against direct contact with power circuits (degree of protection IP40, IK07) b increase insulation between phases. Insulating accessories for plug-in bases include: b an adapter offering the same connection possibilities as the circuit breaker b long terminal shields for the plug-in base.
E58541

049221

Terminal shields

Compact NS equipped with terminal shields.

E58542

Interphase barriers

Interphase barriers
Safety accessories for maximum insulation at the power-connection points: b they clip easily onto the circuit breaker b not compatible with terminal shields b special version for plug-in bases.
E58543

Rear insulating screens

Safety accessories for insulation between connections and the backplate. Compatible with terminal shields or interphase barriers.

Rear insulating screens

104

E28443

OF1

SD

SDE OF2

Connection of electrical auxiliaries

Fixed configuration
Auxiliary circuits exit the device through a knock-out in the front cover.

MN/MX

motor mechanism

OR

rotary handle

SDV

Compact NS100/160/250

E28444

OF1 OF2 OF3

SD

SDE

E18585

Plug-in and withdrawable configurations

MN/MX

motor mechanism rotary handle

E18586

OR

SDV

Compact NS400 to 630

Automatic auxiliary connectors Auxiliary circuits exit the circuit breaker via one to three automatic auxiliary connectors (nine wires each). These are made up of: b a moving part, connected to the circuit breaker via a support (one support per circuit breaker) b a fixed part, mounted on the plug-in base, equipped with connectors for bare cables up to 2.5 mm2. Selection of automatic auxiliary connectors. For Compact NS400 to 630, connection wires for the options installed with trip unit STR53UE also exit via the automatic auxiliary connectors.
E21397

E21398

connector 2 connector 1 OF2/SDV OF1 SDE/MT SD MT MN/MX

connector 3 OF3/SDV connector 2 COM connector 1 OF2 T OF1 SDE/MT SD MT MN/MX

Compact NS100 to 250

Compact NS400 to 630

Manual auxiliary connector for withdrawable configurations Withdrawable circuit breakers may be equipped with one to three plugs with nine wires each. In disconnected position, the auxiliaries remain connected and can therefore be tested by operating the circuit breaker.
E18587

Each auxiliary is equipped with a terminal block with numbered terminals for connection of wires up to: b 1.5 mm2 for auxiliary contacts and voltage releases b 2.5 mm2 for the motor-mechanism module.

Nine-wire manual auxiliary connector

105

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)

Indication contacts
Common-point changeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status information and can thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc. They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation. Functions b OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts b SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v an overload v a short-circuit v an earth-leakage fault v operation of a voltage release v operation of the push to trip button v disconnection when the device is ON. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. b SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v an overload v a short-circuit v an earth-leakage fault. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. b SDV (Earth-leakage fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an earth fault. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. b CAM (early-make or early-break function) - indicates the position of the rotary handle. Used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices (early break) or to energise a control device prior to circuit-breaker closing (early make) b CE / CD (connected/disconnected position) - microswitch type carriage switches for withdrawable circuit breakers Installation b OF, SD, SDE and SDV functions - a single type of contact provides all these different indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. The contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker (or the Vigi module for the SDV function). The SDE function on a circuit breaker equipped with a thermal-magnetic trip unit requires the SDE actuator. b CAM function - the contact fits into the rotary-handle unit (direct or extended). b CE / CD (connected/disconnected) function - two parts must be fitted on the fixed and moving parts of the chassis. Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts Contacts
Rated thermal current (A) Minimum load Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) Operational 24 V current (A) 48 V 110 V 220/240 V 250 V 380/440 V 480 V 660/690 V

044314

Changeover contacts

All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available in low-level versions capable of switching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits).

Standard
6 100 mA at 24 V AC12 AC15 DC12 6 6 6 6 6 2.5 6 5 0.6 6 4 0.3 6 2 6 1.5 6 0.1 -

Low level
5 1 mA at 4 V DC AC12 AC15 DC12 5 3 5 5 3 2.5 5 2.5 0.6 5 2 5 0.3 5 1.5 5 1 -

DC14 1 0.2 0.05 0.03 -

DC14 1 0.2 0.05 0.03 -

106

045349

Rotary handles
There are two types of rotary handle: b direct rotary handle b extended rotary handle. There are two models: b standard with a black handle b VDE with a red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control.

Direct rotary handle

Compact NS250L with a direct rotary handle

Degree of protection IP40, IK07. The direct rotary handle maintains: b visibility of and access to trip unit settings b suitability for isolation b indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped b access to the push to trip button b circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks, shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied). It replaces the circuit-breaker front cover. Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations: b motor control centre (MCC) switchboards: v door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON v circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open b a higher degree of protection (IP43, IK07) b machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E03.81.501, IP54, IK08.

044316

Extended rotary handle

Compact NS250L with an extended rotary handle

Degree of protection IP 55, IK08. This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of switchboards, from the switchboard front. It maintains: b suitability for isolation b indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped b access to trip unit settings, when the switchboard door is open b circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks, shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied). The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked. The extended rotary handle is made up of: b a unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws) b an assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally b an extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max distance between the back of circuit breaker and door is: v 185 to 600 mm for Compact NS100 to 250 v 210 to 625 mm for Compact NS400 to 630. For withdrawable configurations, the extended rotary handle is also available with a telescopic shaft with two stable positions.

107

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)

Remote tripping
MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker. MN undervoltage release This release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a tripping threshold: b tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage b circuit breaker closing is possible if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated voltage. For a lower value, circuit breaker closing cannot be guaranteed. Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard IEC 60947-2. Time-delay unit for an MN release Eliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting 200 ms. It is used in conjunction with: b a 250 V DC MN release, control voltage 220/240 V AC b a 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC. MX shunt release Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un. Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 20 ms) or maintained. Operation When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must be reset locally. MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing. In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary, is not possible. Mechanical characteristics b endurance is equal to 50 % of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker b the releases clip in behind the front cover b connection using wires up to 1.5 mm2, to integrated terminal blocks. Electrical characteristics b consumption: v pick-up (MX): < 10 VA v seal-in (MN and MNR): < 5 VA. b response time: < 50 ms.

044313

MX or MN voltage release

108

047313

Motor-mechanism module
When equipped with a motor-mechanism module, Compact NS circuit breakers feature very high mechanical endurance as well as easy and sure operation: b all circuit-breaker indications and information remain visible and accessible, including trip-unit settings and indications b suitability for isolation is maintained and padlocking remains possible b double insulation of the front face. Applications b local motor-driven operation, centralised operation, automatic distribution control b normal/standby source changeover or switching to a replacement source to optimise energy costs b load shedding and reconnection to optimise energy costs b synchrocoupling. Automatic operation b circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by two impulse-type or maintained control signals b automatic spring charging following voluntary tripping (by MN or MX), with standard wiring b mandatory manual reset following tripping due to an electrical fault. Manual operation b transfer to manual mode using a switch (9) with possibility of remote mode indication b circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by 2 pushbuttons b recharging of stored-energy system by pumping the lever 9 times b padlocking in OFF position. Installation and connection All installation (fixed, plug-in/withdrawable) and connection possibilities are maintained. Motor-mechanism module connections are made behind its front cover to integrated terminals, for cables up to 2.5 mm2. Accessories b keylock for locking in OFF position b operations counter for the Compact NS400 and NS630, indicating the number of ON and OFF cycles. The counter must be installed on the front of the motormechanism module. Characteristics Motor mechanism
contact position indicator (suitability for isolation) outgoing-circuit identification labels spring status indicator (charged, discharged) locking device (keylock) locking device (OFF position), using 1 to 3 padlocks, shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm, not supplied 6 manual spring-charging lever 7 I (ON) pushbutton 8 O (OFF) pushbutton 9 manual/auto mode selection switch. The position of this switch can be indicated remotely 10 operations counter (Compact NS400/630) 1 2 3 4 5
Response time (ms) Rate Control voltage (V) opening closing cycles/minute max. DC AC 50/60 Hz Consumption
(1)

Compact NS250H with motor mechanism

1
E21006

compact

NS400 H
Ui 750V. Uimp 8kV. Ue Icu (V) (kA) 220/240 380/415 440 500/525 600/690 100 70 65 50 20

cat A Ics = 100% Icu IEC 947-2

UTE VDE BS UNE NEMA CEI

O OFF

charged

In = 400A

manu

auto

O
push OFF

I
push ON

10

MT100 to MT630
< 600 < 80 4 24/30 - 48/60 110/130 - 250 48 (50 Hz) - 110/130 220/240 - 380/440 y 500 y 500 y 500 y 500

DC (W) AC (VA)

opening closing opening closing

Electrical endurance Circuit breaker + motor-mechanism module, in thousands of operations (IEC 60947-2), at 440 V.
E21300

50 40 30 20 15 10 6 4 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 0,7 NS250 NS400 NS630 1 I/In NS100 NS160

(1) For NS100/250, motor "vibratory" type consider inrush current as 2 In during 10 ms cycling.

109

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)

Indications and measurement
Voltage presence indicator
The indicator detects and indicates that circuit breaker terminals are supplied with power. Installation b in the long or short terminal shields, via the knockouts b not compatible with the motor-mechanism module b upstream or downstream of the circuit breaker b degree of protection IP40, IK04. Electrical characteristics Operates on all networks with voltages ranging from 220 to 550 V AC.

048287

Current-transformer module
This module enables direct connection of a measurement device such as an ammeter or a Digipact power meter (not supplied). Installation b directly on the downstream circuit-breaker terminals b degree of protection IP40, IK04 b class II insulation between front and the power circuits b connection to 6 integrated connectors for cables up to 2.5 mm2. Electrical characteristics b transformer with 5 A secondary winding. b accuracy class 3 for the following output-power consumptions: v rating 100 A: 1.6 VA v rating 150 A: 3 VA v rating 250 A: 5 VA v rating 400/630A: 8 VA.

Compact NS630L with voltage-presence indicator

041892

Current-transformer module with voltage measurement outputs

For direct connection of a digital power monitoring unit: Power Meter PM500, PM700, PM800, etc. (not supplied). Installation b mounts directly on the downstream terminals of the circuit breaker b degree of protection: IP40 and IK04 b class II insulation of front with respect to the power circuits b built-in connectors for cables from 1.5 to 2.5 mm2. Electrical characteristics b rated operational voltage Ue: 530 V b frequencies of measured values: 5060 Hz b three CTs with 5 A secondary windings for the rated primary current IN v class 0.5 to 1 for rated power consumption values at the output: - 125 A, 150 A and 250 A ratings: class 1 for 1.1 VA - 400/600 A rating: class 0.5 for 2 VA v use a cable of 2.5 mm2 section up to 2.5 m long. b four voltage measurement outputs including protection with automatic reset. v voltage measurement output impedance 3500 Ohm 25 %, maximum current 1 mA.

Compact NS630H with current-transformer module

045212

Ammeter and Imax ammeter modules

Ammeter module Measures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the current of each phase (selection of phases by 3-position switch in front). Imax ammeter module Measures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the maximum current flowing in the middle phase. The Imax value can be reset on the front. Installation b identical for both types of ammeter module b directly on the downstream circuit-breaker terminals b ammeter clips into module in any of four 90 positions, i.e. can be installed of devices mounted both vertically and horizontally b degree of protection IP40, IK04 b class II insulation between front and the power circuits. Electrical characteristics b ammeter module: accuracy class 4.5 b Imax ammeter module: v accuracy 6 % v maximum currents are displayed only if they last at least 15 minutes.

Compact NS250L with ammeter module

110

041896

Insulation-monitoring module
This module detects and indicates an insulation drop on a load circuit (TN-S or TT systems). Operation is identical to that of a Vigi module, but without circuit-breaker tripping. Indication by a red LED in front. An auxiliary contact may be installed for remote insulation-drop indications. Installation b directly on the downstream circuit-breaker terminals b degree of protection: IP40, IK04 b double insulation of the front face. Electrical characteristics b settings: 100, 200, 500 and 1000 mA b accuracy: -50 +0 % b time delay following drop: 5 to 10 seconds b AC-system voltage: 200 to 440 V AC and 440 to 550 V AC.

Compact NS250H with insulation-monitoring module

053172

Communicating auxiliaries
Communicating versions of the auxiliary contacts and the motor-mechanism module also exist for integration in a Digipact communications system. They simply replace the standard electrical auxiliaries. Using the STR53UE and STR43ME trip units equipped with the COM communications option, it is possible to transmit data to Digipact modules: b settings b rms values of phase and neutral currents b current of the most heavily loaded phase b overload alarm in progress b tripping cause (overload, short-circuit, etc.).
Compact NS equipped with communicating auxiliary contacts and motor-mechanism module

054481

Withdrawable Compact NS equipped with communicating auxiliary contacts

111

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)

Locking systems
Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2. Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). Control device
Toggle

Function
lock in OFF position lock in OFF or ON position lock in OFF position

Means
padlock padlock padlock keylock padlock padlock keylock padlock keylock

Required accessories
removable device fixed device

Direct rotary handle

locking device + keylock

MCC rotary handle Rotary handle Extended rotary handle Motor mechanism

lock in OFF position lock in OFF position lock in OFF position, door opening prevented lock in OFF position, motor mechanism locked out

keylock

locking device (keylock incorporated)

E58544

E58545

E18620

ON I

pr of al ux

O OFF

Locking of the toggle using a removable device

Locking of the toggle using a fixed device

Locking of the rotary handle using a padlock or a keylock.

112

048803

Individual enclosures
Compact NS and Vigicompact NS devices with two, three or four poles may be installed in individual enclosures. All fixed, front connections are possible, except right-angle and edgewise terminal extensions. Spreaders may be installed in the enclosures intended for Interpact Compact and Vigicompact NS250 to 630 devices. There are two models of enclosures: b heavy-duty metal individual enclosure, with: v metal enclosure v door with keylock and cut-out for rotary handle v direct rotary handle (CNOMO, IP55, IK08) v device mounting plate v removable plate (without holes) for cable entry through bottom b heavy-duty insulating individual enclosure, with: v polyester insulating enclosure v transparent cover, screwed, lead sealable, with cut-out for rotary handle v extended rotary handle v device mounting plate v removable plates (without holes) for cable entry through bottom and/or top. Dimensions (H x W x D in mm) b metal enclosures: v Compact and Vigicompact NS100 to 160: 450 x 350 x 250 v Compact and Vigicompact NS250: 650 x 350 x 250 v Compact NS400: 650 x 350 x 250 v Compact NS630 and Vigicompact NS400 to 630: 850 x 350 x 250 b insulating enclosures: v Compact and Vigicompact NS100 to 160: 360 x 270 x 235 v Compact NS250: 540 x 270 x 235 v Compact NS400 to 630: 720 x 360 x 235 v Vigicompact NS250 to 630: 720 x 360 x 235
W
E44458

Heavy-duty insulating individual enclosure for Compact NS

113

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)

Escutcheons
Escutcheons are an optional feature mounted on the switchboard door. They increase the degree of protection to at least IP40, IK07.
E21265 E23938

E23935

E23936

ON I

push to trip

O OFF

Front-panel escutcheons for toggle and Vigi module (NSA160). Secures to the panel, from the front.

Toggle cover b degree of protection IP43, IK07 b fits on the front of the circuit breaker.

E22039

Front-panel escutcheon for rotary handle. Secures to the panel by four screws, from the front. For circuit breaker with motor mechanism and Vigi module, use the protection collar for front panel mounting (see below).

80 40 0 120

Front-panel escutcheons for ammeter module. Secures to the panel by four screws, from the front.

Protection collar for toggle and Vigi module on withdrawable devices

Protection collars maintain the degree of protection, whatever the position of the device (connected, disconnected). b front-panel escutcheons are mandatory (same as those for rotary handles and ammeter modules) b collars are mounted on the device using two screws b escutcheons are attached to the switchboard b a toggle extension is supplied with the collar. For the insulation-monitoring module, use the same elements as for the Vigi module. Front-panel escutcheons for motor mechanism, rotary handles, ammeter modules Same as for fixed devices.

114

E21267

Outgoing-circuit identification
Compact NS100 to 630 devices come with clip-in labels for hand-written indications. It is also possible to use pre-printed Telemecanique labels part number AB1-**: v Compact NS100 to 250: 8 digits v Compact NS400 to 630: 16 digits.
E18595

P D E P. P O M
Identification accessories

.P DE P
push to trip

Sealing accessories
This option includes the elements required to fit lead seals to prevent: b front removal b rotary-handle removal b opening of the motor-mechanism module b access to auxiliaries b access to trip-unit settings b trip-unit removal b access to earth-leakage protection settings b terminal-shield removal b access to power connections.
E18596

Sealing accessories

115

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version)

E59224

Sealable terminal shield

Terminal extension for cables with lugs Interphase barriers

Connection kit for connectors

Spreader

Vertical connection adapter

Phase barriers Rear connectors Spreader

Auxiliary contact

Voltage release

I on

I O
push push OFF

ON

arged disch

O OFF

Manual control with front connection

I on

d trippe

reset

F 0 OF

012

53

Manual control with rear connection

trippe

reset

0 OF

Direct rotary handle

tripped reset

Electrical control with mixed connection Extended rotary handle Communications module

Connection kit for connectors

Sealable terminal shield Escutcheon

116

Compact NS630 to 1600 (withdrawable version)

E59225

Interphase barriers

Terminal extention for cables with lugs

Vertical connection adapter Spreader Rear connectors

Spreader

Auxiliary contact

Chassis with front or rear connection

Voltage release

I on

I O
push push OFF

ON

Manual operation
d trippe reset

arged disch

O OFF

I on

0 OF

012

53

d trippe

reset

0 OF

Electrical operation
tripped reset

Direct rotary handle

Communications module

Extended rotary handle

Escutcheon

Transparent cover

117

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS630b to 1600

Installation
Fixed configuration
Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers may be installed vertically, horizontally or flat on their back.

PB101206_39

E59226A

Fixed Compact NS800H

E59278

Mounting on a backplate

E59227A

Mounting on rails

The withdrawable configuration makes it possible to: b extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit breaker without having to touch connections; b allow for the addition of future circuits at a later date.
E45176

Withdrawable configuration
Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers should be installed vertically only.

E59228A

Mounting on a backplate

E59229A

Rear mounting on rails

E59230

Withdrawable Compact NS800H

E59281A

Device on mounting plate

E59231

Device on rails

118

The device may be in one of four positions on the chassis: b connected position. The power circuits and auxiliary contacts are all connected b test position. The power circuits are disconnected. The auxiliary contacts are still connected and the device can be operated electrically b disconnected position. The power circuits and auxiliary contacts are all disconnected, however the device is still mounted on the chassis. It can be operated manually (ON, OFF, "push to trip"). b removed position. All circuits are disconnected. The device simply rests on the chassis rails and can be removed.

E59232A

Connected

Test

Disconnected

Removed

The multifunctional chassis for Compact NS630b to 1600 devices is particularly suited for incoming circuit breakers. Features include: b device connection and disconnection through a door, using a crank that can be stored in the chassis b three positions (connected, test and disconnected) that are indicated: v locally by a position indicator v remotely by carriage switches (3 for the connected position, 2 for the disconnected position and 1 for the test position) b circuit-breaker ON/OFF commands through a switchboard front panel. Locking There are extensive locking possibilities: b chassis locking in connected, disconnected and test positions using three padlocks and two keylocks, on the switchboard front panel b door interlock (inhibits door opening with breaker in connected position) b racking interlock (inhibits racking with door open) b locking in each of the connected, disconnected and test positions during device connection or disconnection. Continuation to the next position requires pressing a release button to free the crank. Other safety function Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with compatible characteristics.

E59267A

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

mismatch protection door interlock racking interlock keylock locking padlock locking position indicator chassis front plate (accessible with cubicle door closed) crank entry reset button crank storage

119

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)

Types of connection
Front connection
E59235

Compact NS630b to 1600 fixed and withdrawable devices can be connected using: b horizontal or vertical rear connections b front connections b mixed connections b a combination of front and rear connections.

Rear connection
Horizontal Vertical

E59233A

Simply turn a horizontal rear connector 90 to make it a vertical connector.

Combination of front and rear connections

Note. Compact circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with bare-copper, tinned-copper and tinned-aluminium conductors, requiring no particular treatment.

120

E59236

E59237

E59234A

To ensure performance and isolation, depending on the type of circuit breaker (N, H, L, LB) and type of connection, certain isolation accessories are mandatory.
Type of accessories

Connections
Accessories

Compact NS630b to NS1600 Fixed

Front connection
DB107666

Withdrawable
Front connection
DB107666

Rear connection

Rear connection

Vertical-connection adapters

Set of bare-cable connectors and terminal shields for ratings y 1250 A

DB107667

DB107661

DB107661

(1) (2) (3)

DB107668

(1)
DB107668

DB107664

Interphase barriers

DB107667

Cable lug adapters

DB107660

(1)

Spreaders

Arc chute screen

DB107665

(1) (2) (3)

(1) Mandatory for voltages u 500 V unless using the bare-cable connector + terminal shield kit. (2) Mandatory for performance levels L and LB on fixed circuit breakers, whatever the voltage. (3) Mandatory for fixed front-connected circuit breakers with vertical-connection adapters oriented towards the front.

DB107669

Safety shutters with locking by padlocks (IP20)

DB107662

Connection shield

121

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)

Front connection of fixed devices

E54540

Bars
Fixed, front-connection Compact NS630b to 1600 devices are equipped with terminals comprising captive screws for direct connection of bars. Other connection possibilities for bars include verticalconnection adapters for edgewise bars and spreaders to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm. If the vertical connection adapters are front oriented, then it is mandatory to install the arc chute screen in order to comply with the safety clearances.
E46426A

E59235

Vertical-connection adapters

E59238A

E59239A

E46431A

Spreaders.

E59240A

E54457

Bare cables
Special sets of connectors and terminal shields may be used to connect up to four 240 mm2 copper or aluminium cables for each phase. Bare cable connection is possible for ratings up to and including 1250 A.
E46887A

E59241A

E70750

4-cable connectors

E54456

Cables with lugs

Cable lug adapters are combined with the verticalconnection adapters. One to four cables with crimped lugs (y 300 mm2) may be connected. To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned between the terminal extensions. If the cable lug adapters are installed over the top of the arc chute chambers, then it is mandatory to install the arc chute screen in order to comply with the safety clearances.
E46427A

Cable lug adapters

E59242A

122

E59243A

E70751

Rear connection of fixed devices

E54540

Bars
Fixed, rear-connection Compact NS630b to 1600 devices equipped with horizontal or vertical connectors may be directly connected to flat or edgewise bars, depending on the position of the connectors. Spreaders are available to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm.
E46431A

E59236

Spreaders.

E59257A

E59247A

E54456

Cables with lugs

Cable lug adapters enable connection of one to four cables with crimped lugs (y 300 mm2). To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned between the terminal extensions.
E46427A

E59248A

Cable lug adapters

E59250A

E59249A

123

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)

Front connection of withdrawable devices
Bars

E54540

Withdrawable, front-connection Compact NS630b to 1600 devices are suitable for direct connection of bars. Other connection possibilities for bars include verticalconnection adapters for edgewise bars and spreaders to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm.
E59252A E59253A

E59280

E46426A

Vertical-connection adapters

E46431A E59254A

Spreaders

Cables with lugs

Cable lug adapters enable connection of one to four cables with crimped lugs (y 300 mm2). To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned between the terminal extensions.
E54456 E46427A

Cable lug adapters

124

E59255A

E59253A

Rear connection of withdrawable devices

E54540

Bars
Withdrawable, rear-connection Compact NS630b to 1600 devices equipped with horizontal or vertical connectors may be directly connected to flat or edgewise bars, depending on the position of the connectors. Spreaders are available to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm.
E46431A

E59282A

Spreaders

E59258A

E54456

E59260A

Cable lug adapters enable connection of one to four cables with crimped lugs (y 300 mm2). To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned between the terminal extensions.

E46427A

Cables with lugs

E59259A

Cable lug adapters

E59261A

E59262A

125

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)

Insulation of live parts

E45190

Connection shield
Mounted on fixed, front-connection devices, this shield insulates power-connection points, particularly when cables with lugs are used
E59263A

Connection shield

Interphase barriers
These barriers are flexible insulated partitions used to reinforce isolation of connection points in installations with busbars, whether insulated or not. Barriers are installed vertically between front or rear connection terminals. They are mandatory for voltages u 500 V for both fixed and withdrawable products and for L and LB types, whatever the voltage.
E79056

Compact NS equipped with connection shield

Interphase barriers for fixed device, front connection

E79057

Interphase barriers for fixed device, rear connection

E59264A

Interphase barriers for withdrawable device, rear connection

Safety shutters
Mounted on the chassis, the safety shutters automatically block access to the disconnecting contact cluster when the device is in the disconnected or test positions (degree of protection IP20). When the device is removed from its chassis, no live parts are accessible. The shutters can be padlocked (padlock not supplied) to: b prevent connection of the device b lock the shutters in the closed position.
E59265A

Safety shutters

126

Connection of electrical auxiliaries

E59283A

Fixed devices
CAO1 CAO2 CAF1 CAF2 OF1 OF2 SD SDE COM MN or MX
E59286A

Connections are made directly to the auxiliaries once the front has been removed. Wires exit the circuit breaker through a knock-out in the top.

rotary handle

OF3

Manually operated device

E59284A

SDE

OF3

OF2

COM

MN or ou MX

OF1

Withdrawable devices
Auxiliary circuits are connected to terminal blocks located in the top part of the chassis. The auxiliary terminal block is made up of a fixed and moving part. The two parts are in contact when the device is in the test and connected positions.
E59287A

Electrically operated device

E59285A

CD2

CD1

CE3

CE2

CE1

Withdrawable device

CT1

127

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)

Indication contacts
Contacts installed in the device
Changeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status information and can thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc. They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation. Functions b OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the main circuit breaker contacts b SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v an overload v a short-circuit v an earth-leakage fault. v operation of a voltage release v operation of the "push to trip" button v disconnection when the device is ON. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. b SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v an overload v a short-circuit v an earth-leakage fault. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. b CAF / CAO (early-make or early-break function) - indicates the position of the rotary handle. Used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices (early break) or to energise a control device prior to circuit-breaker closing (early make). Installation b OF, SD and SDE functions - a single type of contact provides all these different indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. The contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker b CAF / CAO function - the contact fits into the rotary-handle unit (direct or extended). Electrical characteristics of the OF/SD/SDE/CAF/CAO auxiliary contacts Contacts
Rated thermal current (A) Minimum load Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) Operational 24 V current (A) 48 V 110 V 220/240 V 250 V 380/440 V 480 V 660/690 V

044314

OF, SD and SDE changeover contacts

All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available in "low-level" versions capable of switching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits).

Standard
6 100 mA at 24 V AC12 AC15 DC12 6 6 6 6 6 2.5 6 5 0.6 6 4 0.3 6 2 6 1.5 6 0.1 -

Low level
5 1 mA at 4 V DC AC12 AC15 DC12 5 3 5 5 3 2.5 5 2.5 0.6 5 2 5 0.3 5 1.5 5 1 -

DC14 1 0.2 0.05 0.03 -

DC14 1 0.2 0.05 0.03 -

056456

Connected, disconnected, test position carriage switches

A single type of changeover contact can be mounted optionally on the chassis to indicate, depending on the slot where it is installed: b the connected (CE) position b the disconnected (CD) position. This position is indicated when the required clearance for isolation of the power and auxiliary circuits is reached b the test (CT) position. In this position, the power circuits are disconnected and the auxiliary circuits are connected. Installation b contacts for the connected (CE), disconnected (CD) and test (CT) positions clip into the upper front section of the chassis. Electrical characteristics of the CE/CD/CT auxiliary contacts Contacts
Rated thermal current (A) Minimum load Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) Operational 24 V current (A) 48 V 110 V 220/240 V 250 V 380/440 V 660/690 V

Carriage switches for connected (CE), disconnected (CD) and test (CT) positions

Standard
8 100 mA at 24 V AC12 AC15 DC12 8 6 2.5 8 6 2.5 8 5 0.8 8 4 0.3 8 3 6 0.1 -

Low level
5 2 mA at 15 V DC AC12 AC15 DC12 5 3 5 5 3 2.5 5 2.5 0.8 5 2 5 0.3 5 1.5 -

DC14 1 0.2 0.05 0.03 -

DC14 1 0.2 0.05 0.03 -

128

E45159

Rotary handles
There are two types of rotary handle: b direct rotary handle b extended rotary handle. There are two models: b standard with a black handle b VDE with a red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control.

Direct rotary handle

Degree of protection IP40, IK07. The direct rotary handle maintains: b visibility of and access to trip unit settings b suitability for isolation b indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped b access to the "push to trip" button b circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks, shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied). It replaces the circuit-breaker front cover. Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations: b motor control centre (MCC) switchboards: v door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON; v circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open; b a higher degree of protection (IP43, IK07) b machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E03.81.501, IP54, IK07.

Compact NS with a direct rotary handle

E45161

Extended rotary handle

Compact NS with an extended rotary handle

Degree of protection IP55, IK07. This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of switchboards, from the switchboard front. It maintains: b suitability for isolation b indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped b access to trip unit settings, when the switchboard door is open b circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks, shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied). The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked. The extended rotary handle is made up of: b a unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws) b an assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally b an extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max distance between the back of circuit breaker and door is 218/605 mm.

129

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)

Remote tripping
This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of: b a shunt release (2nd MX) b or an undervoltage release (MN) b or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit). These releases (2nd MX or MN) cannot be operated by the communication bus. The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an emergency OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker. Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function
E59433A E46553A E46554A

Manually operated circuit breakers may be equipped with an MX shunt release, an MN undervoltage release or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit). Electrically operated circuit breakers are equipped as standard with a remoteoperating mechanism to remotely open or close the circuit breaker. An MX shunt release or an MN undervoltage release (instantaneous or delayed) may be added.
056421

opening order

opening order

delayed opening order delay unit

10

12

MX voltage release

3 C2 D2 instantaneous opening order MN D1 D1

D2

MX C1

MN

Voltage releases (2nd MX)

When energised, the 2nd MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker. A continuous supply of power to the 2nd MX locks the circuit breaker in the OFF position. Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz V DC Operating threshold Permanent locking function Consumption (VA or W) Circuit-breaker response time at Un 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 0.7 to 1.1 Un 0.85 to 1.1 Un pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5 50 ms 10

Instantaneous voltage releases (MN)

The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage drops to a value between 35 % and 70 % of its rated voltage. If there is no supply on the release, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically. Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts. Circuit-breaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the release returns to 85 % of its rated value. Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz V DC Operating opening threshold closing Consumption (VA or W) MN consumption with delay unit (VA or W) Circuit-breaker response time at Un 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 0.35 to 0.7 Un 0.85 Un pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5 pick-up: 400 (200 ms) hold: 4.5 90 ms 5

MN delay units
To eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable and non-adjustable. Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50-60 Hz /DC Operating threshold Consumption of delay unit alone (VA or W) Circuit-breaker response time at Un non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250 adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480 opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un closing 0.85 Un pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5 non-adjustable adjustable 0.25 s 0.5 s - 0.9 s - 1.5 s - 3 s

130

Electrically operated circuit breakers are equipped as standard with a motor mechanism module. Two solutions are available for electrical operation: b a point-to-point solution b a bus solution with the COM communication option.
E45163

Electrically operated circuit breaker

The motor mechanism module is used to remotely open and close the circuit breaker. It is made up of a spring-charging motor equipped with an opening release and a closing release. An electrical operation function is generally combined with: b device ON/OFF indication (OF) b "fault-trip" indication (SDE). Motor mechanism module
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz V DC Operating threshold Consumption (VA or W) Motor overcurrent Charging time Operating frequency 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/240 - 277- 380/415 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/125 - 200/250 0.85 to 1.1 Un 180 2 to 3 In for 0.1 second maximum 4 seconds maximum 3 cycles per minute

Electrically operated Compact NS circuit breaker

Electrical closing order The release remotely closes the circuit breaker if the spring mechanism is charged. Release electrical characteristics are identical to those of an MX release (see above), the operating threshold is from 0.85 to 1.1 Un and the circuit-breaker response time at Un is 60 ms 10. The Compact NS electrical operation function can be used to implement a synchrocoupling system. Electrical opening order The release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when energised. The supply can be impulse-type or maintained. Release electrical characteristics are identical to those of an MX release (see above).

Wiring diagram of a bus-type electrical operation solution

E59435A E59434A

Wiring diagram of a point-to-point electrical operation solution

opening order A4

closing order A2 B4

opening order A4

closing order A2 B4

fault 82

open 84 12

closed 14

motor mechanism module

motor mechanism module

OF1 SDE

A1

A1

81

11

COM supervisor

OF SDE

In the event of simultaneous opening and closing orders, the mechanism discharges without any movement of the main contacts. In the event of maintained opening and closing orders, the standard electrical operation solution provides an antipumping function by blocking the main contacts in open position.

131

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)

E45194

Toggle locked by removable padlocking device

Locking on manually operated devices

Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2. Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). Control device
Toggle

Function
lock in OFF position lock in OFF or ON position lock in b OFF position b OFF or ON position lock in b OFF position b OFF or ON position lock in OFF position, door opening prevented

Means
padlock padlock padlock keylock padlock keylock padlock keylock

Required accessories
removable device fixed device

Direct rotary handle

E45159

Rotary handle locked by a keylock

locking device + keylock locking device + keylock keylock

CNOMO direct rotary handle

Extended rotary handle

Locking in ON position does not prevent the device from tripping in the event of a fault or remote tripping order.

E59436A

Access to pushbuttons protected by transparent cover

056447

Locking on electrically operated devices

1 reset of mechanical trip indicator 2 OFF pushbutton 3 OFF position locking 4 ON pushbutton 5 springs charged indication 6 pushbutton locking 7 contact position indication 8 operation counter

1
056446

4
I O
push push OFF ON

Pushbutton locking using a padlock

5 6 7

ed harg disc

O OFF

012

53

Pushbutton locking
OFF position locking using padlocks

The transparent cover blocks access to the pushbuttons used to open and close the device. It is possible to independently lock the opening OFF button and the closing ON button. The pushbuttons may be locked using either: b three padlocks (not supplied) b lead seal b two screws.

056448

Device locking in the OFF position

The circuit breaker is locked in the OFF position by physically maintaining the opening pushbutton pressed down: b using padlocks (one to three padlocks, not supplied) b using a keylock (supplied). Keys may be removed only when locking is effective (Profalux or Ronis type locks). The keylocks are available in any of the following configurations: b one keylock b one keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied separately for interlocking with another device. A locking kit (without lock) is available for installation of a keylock (Ronis, Profalux, Kirk or Castell).

OFF position locking using a keylock and padlocks

056449

132

Chassis locking
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 mismatch protection door interlock racking interlock keylock locking padlock locking position indicator chassis front plate (accessible with cubicle door closed) 8 crank entry 9 reset button 10 crank storage
E59267A

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2

056450

056451

Disconnected position locking

Mounted on the chassis and accessible with the door closed, these devices lock the circuit breaker in the disconnected position in two manners: b using padlocks (standard), up to three padlocks (not supplied) b using keylocks (optional), one or two different keylocks are available. Profalux and Ronis keylocks are available in different options: b one keylock b one keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied separately, using the same key, for interlocking with another device b one (or two) keylocks mounted on the device + one (or two) identical keylocks supplied separately, for interlocking with another device. A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis, Profalux, Kirk or Castell).
Disconnected position locking by keylocks

Disconnected position locking by padlocks

Connected, disconnected and test position locking

The connected, disconnected and test positions are shown by an indicator. The racking crank blocks when the exact position is obtained. A release button is used to free it. On request, the disconnected position locking system may be modified to lock the circuit breaker in any of the three positions, connected, disconnected and test.

056417

Door interlock

Door interlock
Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in connected or test position. It the breaker is put in the connected position with the door open, the door may be closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.
056452

Racking interlock

Racking interlock
This device prevents insertion of the crank when the cubicle door is open (device cannot be connected).

Mismatch protection
Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with compatible characteristics. It is made up of two parts (one on the chassis and one on the circuit breaker) offering twenty different combinations that the user may select.
056453

Mismatch protection

133

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)

Other accessories
Auxiliary terminal shield (CB)
Optional equipment mounted on the chassis, the shield prevents access to the terminal block of the electrical auxiliaries.

056463

Auxiliary terminal shield

Operation counter (CDM)

056464

Operation counter

The operation counter sums the number of operating cycles and is visible on the front panel. It is compatible with electrically operated devices.

Escutcheon (CDP)
Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases the degree of protection to IP40. It is available in fixed and withdrawable versions.

Transparent cover (CCP) for escutcheon

Escutcheon

Optional equipment mounted on the escutcheon, the cover is hinged and secured by a screw. It increases the degree of protection to IP54 and the degree of protection against mechanical impacts to IK10. It may be used for withdrawable devices only.

E45184

Blanking plate (OP) for escutcheon

Used with the escutcheon, this option closes off the door cutout of a cubicle not yet equipped with a device. It may be used with the escutcheon for both fixed and withdrawable devices.
E45187

Transparent cover

E59987

Blanking plate

134

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS1600b to 3200 (fixed version)

OFF OFF

OFF OFF

135

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS1600b to 3200 (cont.)

Installation

E45178

Fixed circuit breakers

Compact NS1600b to 3200 circuit breakers should be installed vertically only.

E59271A

OFF OFF

Fixed Compact NS Mounting on rails

E59281A

Connection
Front connection
NS1600 to 2500
E59726A E59272A
OFF OFF

NS3200

OFF OFF

Bars
Bars may be directly connected to the terminals of Compact NS1600b to 3200 circuit breakers. NS1600b to 2500
E59275A

E59273

OFF OFF

NS1600b to 2500 with connection for vertical-connection adapters or NS3200

E59727A

E59274A

OFF OFF

E59728A

OFF OFF

136

044314

Indication contacts
Contacts installed in the device
Changeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status information and can thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc. They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation. Functions b OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the main circuit breaker contacts b SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v an overload v a short-circuit v an earth-leakage fault v operation of a voltage release v operation of the "push to trip" button Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. b SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v an overload v a short-circuit v an earth-leakage fault. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. Installation b OF, SD and SDE functions - a single type of contact provides all these different indication functions, depending on the position where it is inserted in the device. The contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker. Electrical characteristics of the OF/SD/SDE auxiliary contacts Contacts
Rated thermal current (A) Minimum load Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) Operational 24 V current (A) 48 V 110 V 220/240 V 250 V 380/440 V 480 V 660/690 V

OF, SD and SDE changeover contacts

All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available in "low-level" versions capable of switching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits).

Standard
6 100 mA at 24 V AC12 AC15 DC12 6 6 6 6 6 2.5 6 5 0.6 6 4 0.3 6 2 6 1.5 6 0.1 -

Low level
5 1 mA at 4 V DC AC12 AC15 DC12 5 3 5 5 3 2.5 5 2.5 0.6 5 2 5 0.3 5 1.5 5 1 -

DC14 1 0.2 0.05 0.03 -

DC14 1 0.2 0.05 0.03 -

137

Functions and characteristics

Electrical and mechanical accessories Compact NS1600b to 3200 (cont.)

Remote tripping
This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of: b a shunt release (2nd MX) b or an undervoltage release (MN) b or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit). These releases (2nd MX or MN) cannot be operated by the communication bus. The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an emergency OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker. Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function
E59433A E46553A E46554A

Compact NS1600b to 3200 circuit breakers may be equipped with an MX shunt release, an MN undervoltage release or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit).
056421

MX voltage release

opening order

opening order

delayed opening order delay unit

10

12

3 C2 D2 instantaneous opening order MN D1 D1

D2

MX C1

MN

Voltage releases (2nd MX)

When energised, the 2nd MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker. A continuous supply of power to the 2nd MX locks the circuit breaker in the OFF position. Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz V DC Operating threshold Permanent locking function Consumption (VA or W) Circuit-breaker response time at Un 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 0.7 to 1.1 Un 0.85 to 1.1 Un pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5 50 ms 10

Instantaneous voltage releases (MN)

The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage drops to a value between 35 % and 70 % of its rated voltage. If there is no supply on the release, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically. Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts. Circuit-breaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the release returns to 85 % of its rated value. Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz V DC Operating opening threshold closing Consumption (VA or W) MN consumption with delay unit (VA or W) Circuit-breaker response time at Un 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 0.35 to 0.7 Un 0.85 Un pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5 pick-up: 400 (200 ms) hold: 4.5 90 ms 5

MN delay units
To eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable and non-adjustable. Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50-60 Hz /DC Operating threshold Consumption of delay unit alone (VA or W) Circuit-breaker response time at Un non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250 adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480 opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un closing 0.85 Un pick-up: 200 (200 ms) hold: 4.5 non-adjustable adjustable 0.25 s 0.5 s - 0.9 s - 1.5 s - 3 s

138

62191

Device locking
Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2. Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). Control device
Toggle

Function
lock in OFF position lock in OFF or ON position

Means
padlock padlock

Required accessories
removable device fixed device

Interphase barriers
Compact NS with toggle locked using a fixed device and padlocks
62190

These barriers are flexible insulated partitions used to reinforce isolation of connection points in installations with busbars, whether insulated or not. Barriers are installed vertically between front connection terminals.

Escutcheon (CDP)
Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases the degree of protection to IP40.

Compact NS with toggle locked using a removable device and padlocks

E79056

Interphase barriers

E94383

Escutcheon

139

Functions and characteristics

Test equipment

Compact NS100 to 630 test equipment for STR electronic trip units
047035 052172

Mini test kit

The mini test kit is a portable unit requiring no external power supply, used to check operation of the electronic trip unit and circuit-breaker tripping. It connects to the test connector on the front of the circuit breaker. Required power source: five 9 V alkaline batteries (not supplied).

Portable test kit

The portable test kit is used to check all aspects of the protection functions: b long time protection b short time protection b instantaneous protection b earth-fault protection. Required power source: 110 or 220 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

Mini test kit

Portable test kit

Compact NS630b to 3200 test equipment for Micrologic control units

Mini test kit
The autonomous hand-held mini test kit may be used to: b check operation of the control unit and the tripping and pole-opening system by sending a signal simulating a short-circuit b supply power to the control units for settings via the keypad when the circuitbreaker is open (Micrologic P and H control units). Required power source: standard LR6-AA battery.
056466

Portable test kit

The portable test kit is may be used to check: b the mechanical operation of the circuit breaker b the electrical continuity of the connection between the circuit breaker and the control unit b operation of the control unit: v display of settings v operating tests on the ASIC electronic component v automatic and manual tests on protection functions v test on the zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) function v inhibition of the earth-fault protection v inhibition of the thermal memory. Note. These test kits are identical for all Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers and all Masterpact NT and NW circuit breakers. Required power source: 110 or 220 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

Portable test kit

140

Display modules

Perfectly integrated in the Compact and Masterpact ranges, Display modules are designed for use with Micrologic control units to provide instant and highly intuitive access to all the information provided by the circuit breakers, including device status, current, voltage and power values, etc.
057454

DMB300 and DMC300 display modules use the power and communications capabilities of the Micrologic control units to centralise the display of electrical values, status conditions and alarms of one or more Compact or Compact circuit breakers. The mounting and cabling system for the display modules ensures fast, easy and reliable installation. Start-up is immediate with no configuration or programming required. Display modules are high-performance devices combining: b simple and easy-to-read dials b powerful and accurate digital processing. Their small size and extensive communications capabilities make for easy and flexible installation and operation.

Display modules
Associated circuit breakers
Type Number

DMB300

DMC300

Compact or Masterpact equipped with Micrologic control units 1 to 4 1 to 16 Black and white 240 x 64 pixels 5 buttons Colour, touch screen 5, 320 x 240 pixels Touch screen

Display
DMB300 display module: basic and harmonic measurements
Screen type Screen size Entry

Information displayed
Currents (per phase) Currents I1, I2, I3, IN Maximum current Earth-fault and earth-leakage currents Demand current Maximum demand current Total harmonic distortion (THD) Maximum total harmonic distortion Amplitudes of individual harmonics Voltages Phase-to-phase voltages (U1-2, U2-3, U3-1) Minimum/maximum phase-to-phase voltages Phase-to-neutral voltages (V1-N, V2-N, V3-N) Minimum/maximum phase-to-neutral voltages Frequency Voltage unbalance (% per phase) Total harmonic distortion (% per phase) Maximum total harmonic distortion (% per phase) Amplitudes of individual harmonics Power Active (P), reactive (Q) and apparent (S) power Power factor and cos Maximum power (P, Q, S) Demand power (P, Q, S) Maximum demand power (P, Q, S) Metering Active, reactive and apparent energy On-line help On-line help is available for each type of information supplied by the module Circuit-breaker diagnostics Identification of control units Reading of protections Circuit-breaker status Type of trip Current alarms Maintenance indicator Installation diagnosis Indication of faulty devices Fault log A A A A P P P P P H H H H H A A A A P P P P P P P H H H H H H H H
E79078

A A A

P P P P P

H H H H H H H

A A A

P P P P P

H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H

DMC300 display module: measurements, harmonic analysis, diagnosis

P P P P P P

H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H

P P P P P

P P P P P P

P P P P P P

A P

Associated Micrologic control unit A = Micrologic A P = Micrologic P H = Micrologic H

Installation and start-up

Mounting Connection Mounted through door, without tools, using 6 spring-clips supplied with the mod. Prefabricated wiring systems

141

Functions and characteristics

Display modules

Wiring system The wiring system is designed for low-voltage power switchboards. Installation requires no tools or special skills. The prefabricated wiring ensures both data transmission (Modbus protocol) and 24V DC power distribution for the display module and the communications modules on the Micrologic control units.

E59178 E59180A

Connection of DMB300 display module

24 V DC power 2
ON ON

E59081

n 4n 4 4 ON n n 3n 3 n 4 n 2n 2 n 3 n 3 n 1n 1 n 2 n 2 OUT OUT n 1 IN IN T

ON

ON

IN

OU

1 3
Reset
push
reset

push OFF

ON

NX 32

H2
Icu (kA) 100 100 85 Icw 85kA/1s Icu
50/60Hz

70 Micrologic Ig Isd I n Ii Ap

Ue (V) 220/440 525 690

Ir

ed discharg

cat.B 100% Ics =

O OFF

947-2 AS NEMA IEC UNE EN 60947-2 CEI BS

UTE VDE

012

53

com

CDM 303: Connection cable between display module and junction block

DMB300 Digipact
volets shutters

Test

1 2 3 4
select

2
ON

NW

1251

H1
12kV

Ui 1000V 8kV Uimp Ue (V) 220/240 480/690

reset

Uimp Icu (kA) 100 85

70 Micrologic Ig Isd I n Ii Ap

Ir

push

O OFF

push

I ON

discharged

O OFF

Ics =

100%

Icu

IEC

947-2

UTE VDE

BS CEI

UNE

NEMA

012

53

IN

n 1 OUT

n 2

n 3

n 4

ON

NW

1251

H1
12kV

Ui 1000V 8kV Uimp Ue (V) 220/240 480/690

reset

Uimp Icu (kA) 100 85

70 Micrologic Ig Isd I n Ii Ap

Ir

push

O OFF

push

I ON

discharged

O OFF

Ics

= 100%

Icu

IEC

947-2

UTE VDE

BS CEI

UNE

NEMA

012

53

CJB 306 junction block

E59179

Compact circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units and the Modbus eco COM option

Connection of DMC300 display module

Maximum distance between module and circuit breaker: 1200 m
5 4
E59176A

CCP 303: Connection cable between Masterpact or Compact and junction block

E59082

2 1

H1 1251 12kV NW Uimp

Ui 1000V 8kV Uimp Ue (V) 220/240 480/690
reset

H1 1251 12kV NW Uimp

Ui 1000V 8kV Uimp Ue (V) 220/240 480/690
reset

Icu (kA) 100 85

70 Micrologic

Icu (kA) 100 85

70 Micrologic Ig Isd I n Ii Ap

Ir

push

O OFF

push

I ON

Ir

Ig Isd I n Ii

Ap

push

O OFF

push

I ON

discharged

discharged

O OFF

O OFF

Ics =

100%

Icu

Ics =

100%

Icu

NEMA 947-2 IEC BS CEI UNE UTE VDE

NEMA 947-2 IEC BS CEI UNE UTE VDE

Reset
push
reset

push OFF

ON

NX 32

H2
Icu (kA) 100 100 85 Icw 85kA/1s Icu
50/60Hz

012

53

012

53

70 Micrologic Ig Isd I n Ii Ap

Ue (V) 220/440 525 690

Ir

ed discharg

cat.B Ics = 100%

O OFF

947-2 AS NEMA IEC UNE EN 60947-2 CEI BS

UTE VDE

NW

1251

H1
12kV

Ui 1000V 8kV Uimp Ue (V) 220/240 480/690

reset

Uimp Icu (kA) 100 85

NW

1251

H1
12kV

Ui 1000V 8kV Uimp Ue (V) 220/240 480/690

reset

Uimp Icu (kA) 100 85

70 Micrologic Ig Isd I n Ii Ap

70 Micrologic Ig Isd I n Ii Ap

Ir

push

O OFF

push

I ON

Ir

push

O OFF

push

I ON

CCR 301: Roll of RS 485 cable (2 RS 485 wires + 2 power supply wires)
E59177

discharged

discharged

O OFF

O OFF

Ics =

100%

Icu

Ics =

100%

Icu

IEC

947-2

UTE VDE

BS CEI

UNE

NEMA

IEC

947-2

UTE VDE

BS CEI

UNE

NEMA

012

53

012

53

Reset
push
70 Micrologic Ig Isd I n Ii Ap reset

push OFF

ON

NX 32

H2
Icu (kA) 100 100 85 Icw 85kA/1s Icu
50/60Hz

Ue (V) 220/440 525 690

ed discharg

cat.B Ics = 100%

Ir

NW

1251

H1
12kV

O OFF

947-2 AS NEMA IEC UNE EN 60947-2 CEI BS

UTE VDE

Ui 1000V 8kV Uimp Ue (V) 220/240 480/690

reset

Uimp Icu (kA) 100 85

NW

1251

H1
12kV

Ui 1000V 8kV Uimp Ue (V) 220/240 480/690

reset

Uimp Icu (kA) 100 85

70 Micrologic Ig Isd I n Ii Ap

70 Micrologic Ig Isd I n Ii Ap

Ir

push

O OFF

push

I ON

Ir

push

O OFF

push

I ON

discharged

discharged

O OFF

O OFF

Ics =

100%

Icu

Ics =

100%

Icu

IEC

947-2

UTE VDE

BS CEI

UNE

NEMA

IEC

947-2

UTE VDE

BS CEI

UNE

NEMA

012

53

012

53

CSD 309: SubD 9-pin connector for colour-coded connection of wires to screw terminals

Compact circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units and the Modbus eco COM option

142

Compact NS

Installation recommendations

Presentation Functions and characteristics

6 15

Operating conditions Installation in switchboards

Power supply and weights Safety clearances and minimum distances Installation example

144 145
145 146 148

Door interlock for Compact NS630b to 1600 Control wiring Power connections for Compact NS80H-MA NSC100N, NSA160 Power connections for Compact NS100 to 630
Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs Connection of bare cables Insulation of live parts

149 150 151 152

152 153 154

Power connections for Compact NS630b to 3200

Sizing of bars Recommended drilling dimensions

155
157 159

Temperature derating
Compact NS devices equipped with thermal-magnetic trip units Compact NS devices equipped with electronic trip units

161
161 162

Power dissipation / Resistance

Compact NS devices equipped with thermal-magnetic trip units Compact NS devices equipped with electronic trip units
Dimensions, volumes Connection Electrical diagrams Additional characteristics Catalogue numbers

163
163 164
165 203 219 251 265

143

Installation recommendations

Operating conditions

E59432A

Altitude derating
Altitude does not significantly affect circuit-breaker characteristics up to 2000 m. Above this altitude, it is necessary to take into account the decrease in the dielectric strength and cooling capacity of air. The following table gives the corrections to be applied for altitudes above 2000 metres. The breaking capacities remain unchanged. Compact NS80 to 630 Altitude (m)
Dielectric resistance voltage (V) 3000 Average insulation level (V) Maximum utilisation voltage (V) 690 Average thermal current (A) at 40 C

2000 m

2000
2500 2100 750 700 550 480 1 x In

3000
1800 600 420 0.96 x In

4000
500 0.93 x In

5000

0.9 x In

Compact NS630b to 3200 Altitude (m)

Dielectric resistance voltage (V) 3000 Average insulation level (V) Maximum utilisation voltage (V) 690 Average thermal current (A) at 40 C
E59571A

2000
2500 2100 750 750 590 520 1 x In

3000
1800 700 460 0.99 x In

4000
600 0.96 x In

5000

0.94 x In

Vibrations
Compact NS devices resist electromagnetic or mechanical vibrations. Tests are carried out in compliance with standard IEC 68-2-6 for the levels required by merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyds, etc.): b 2 13.2 Hz: amplitude 1 mm b 13.2 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g. Excessive vibration may cause tripping, breaks in connections or damage to mechanical parts.

Electromagnetic disturbances
Compact NS devices are protected against: b overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbances b overvoltages caused by an atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-system outage (e.g. failure of a lighting system) b devices emitting radio waves (radios, walkie-talkies, radar, etc.) b electrostatic discharges produced by users. Compact NS devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic-compatibility tests (EMC) defined by the following international standards: b IEC 60947-2, appendix F b IEC 60947-2, appendix B (trip units with Vigi earth-leakage function). The above tests guarantee that: b no nuisance tripping occurs b tripping times are respected.
E59572A

144

Installation in switchboards Power supply and weights

Power supply
Compact NS circuit breakers can be supplied from either the top or the bottom without any reduction in performance. This capability facilitates connection when installed in a switchboard.
E23947

push to trip

Weights
Circuit breaker
NS80H-MA NSC100N 3P/3D 3P/3D 4P/4D NS100N/H 1P/1D 2P/2D NS100N 3P/2D NS100N/H/L 3P/3D 4P/4D NS125E 3P/3D 4P/4D NS160N/H 1P/1D 2P/2D NS160N 3P/2D NS160N/H/L 3P/3D 4P/4D NS250N 3P/2D NS250N/H/L 3P/3D 4P/4D NS400/630N/H/L 3P/3D 4P/4D NS630b to 1600 3P manual operation 4P NS630b to 1600 3P electrical operation 4P NS1600b to 3200 3P 4P NSA NB250N NB400/600N 3P/3D 4P/4D 3P/3D 3P/3D 1.09 1 1.3 0.5 1.45 1.79 2.05 2.57 1.8 2.3 0.5 1.45 1.85 2.10 2.58 1.94 2.2 2.78 6.19 8.13 14 18 14 18 24 36 1.1 1.4 1.94 6.19

Plug-in base

Chassis

Vigi module

Fully visible break block (Interpact INV)

Motor-mechanism module

1.5 1.7

0.8 0.8 1.05 0.8 1.1

2.2 2.2 2.2

0.87 0.87 1.13 0.9 1.2

2 2 2.2

1.2 1.2 1.2

0.8 0.8 1.05 0.8 0.8 1.05 2.4 2.8

2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 14 18 16 21

0.87 0.87 1.13 0.87 0.87 1.13 2.8 3

2 2 2.2 2 2 2.2 4.6 4.9

1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.8 2.8

1.5 1.7

The table above presents the weights (in kg) of the circuit breakers and the main accessories, which must be summed to obtain the total weight of complete configurations.

145

Installation recommendations

Installation in switchboards Safety clearances and minimum distances

Compact NS80 to 630
When installing a circuit breaker, minimum distances (safety clearances) must be maintained between the device and panels, bars and other protection devices installed nearby. These distances, which depend on the ultimate breaking capacity, are defined by tests carried out in accordance with standard IEC 60947-2. If installation conformity is not checked by type tests, it is also necessary to: b use insulated bars for circuit-breaker connections b block off the busbars using insulating screens. For Compact NS80 to 630 devices, terminal shields, interphase barriers and the insulation kit are recommended and may be mandatory depending on the utilisation voltage and the type of installation (fixed, withdrawable) (see page 147). Minimal distance between two adjacent circuit breakers
A1 A2
E23942

Minimal distance between the circuit breaker and top, bottom or side panels
E50701

Minimal distance between the circuit breaker and front or rear panels
front panel

E50700

F if F < 8 mm : an insulating screen is mandatory

D1

D2

C1 C2

bare or painted sheetmetal; insulation or insulated bars

Dimensions (mm) Insulation, insulated bars or painted sheet metal Bare sheetmetal

Compact circuit breaker C1 D1 D2 C2 D1 D2 A1 (2) A2 (3) B NS80H-MA U y 440 V 0 30 30 5 35 35 0 10 0 NSC100N U < 600 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 35 35 0 20 0 U u 600 V 0 30 30 20 (1) 35 35 0 40 0 NS100-250 U y 440 V 0 30 30 5 35 35 0 10 0 U < 600 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 35 35 0 20 0 U u 600 V 0 30 30 20 (1) 35 35 0 40 0 NS400-630 U y 440 V 0 30 30 5 60 60 0 10 0 U < 600 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 60 60 0 20 0 U u 600 V 0 30 30 20 (1) 100 100 0 40 0 (1) Distance must be doubled with interphase barriers. (2) For Compact NS with long or short terminal shields. (3) For Compact NS without terminal shields. The mandatory distances when installing Compact NS circuit breakers are calculated from the device case, not taking into account the terminal shields or the interphase barriers.

146

Fixed Compact NS400 1000 V AC, front connection

Power supply from the top or bottom. Connection by cables or busbars.
E50781

insulation

E94502

150

side panel 30

40

insulating kit

40
150

B=0

bare or painted sheetmetal ; insulation or insulated bars

30

Insulating kit is standard.

Compact NS630b to 3200 (fixed devices)

A (*)
E59717A

B
E59718A

A (*)

146,5 F

(*) An overhead clearance of 50 mm is required to remove the arc chutes.

Insulated parts
NS630b to 1600 A 0 B 0 NS1600b to 3200 A 0 B 0

Metal parts
120 10 120 30

Live parts
180 60 180 60

Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable devices)

A
E59719A E59720A

B C C

40 180 F

Insulated parts
A B C 0 10 0

Metal parts
0 10 0

Live parts
30 60 90

F Datum

147

Installation recommendations

Installation in switchboards Installation example

painted sheetmetal
E50704

Direct connection by bare cables, devices with terminal shields.

Connection by cables with lugs, devices with terminal shields.

Connection by insulated bars, devices with terminal shields.

Rear connection or plug-in base, devices with terminal shields.

Minimum dimensions (mm) Compact circuit breaker NS80H-MA/NSC100N NS100-630 NS630b-1600 NS1600b-3200

A 0 0 250 300

148

Door interlock for Compact NS630b to 1600

Mounted on the left or right-hand side of the chassis, this locking device prevents opening of the door if the circuit breaker is in the connected or test positions. If the circuit breaker was connected with the door open, the door may be closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.

E59429A

4 61 2 11 (1) (2)

Dimensions (mm)
Type NS630b to 1600 (3P) NS630b to 1600 (4P) (1) 135 205 (2) 168 168

Device in the connected or test positions

Door locked
E59430A

door

F 5 23

Device in the disconnected position

Door not locked
E59431A

Note. The door interlock may be mounted on either the left or right-hand side of the chassis. F Datum

149

Installation recommendations

Control wiring

Wiring of voltage releases

During pick-up, the power consumed is approximately 150 to 200 VA. For low control voltages (12, 24, 48 V), maximum cable lengths are imposed by the voltage and the cross-sectional area of cables. Recommended maximum cable lengths (meter).
12 V 24 V 1.5 mm2 35 10 70 44 48 V 2.5 mm2 280 75 550 350 1.5 mm2 165 45 330 210 2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 MN U source 100 % 58 U source 85 % 16 MX-XF U source 100 % 21 12 115 U source 85 % 10 6 75 Note: the indicated length is that of each of the two wires.

24 V DC power-supply module
External 24 V DC power-supply module for Micrologic (F1-, F2+) b do not connect the positive terminal (F2+) to earth b the negative terminal (F1-) can be connected to earth, except in IT systems b a number of Micrologic control units and M6C modules can be connected to the same 24 V DC power supply (the consumption of a Micrologic control unit or an M6C module is approximately 100 mA) b do not connect any devices other than a Micrologic control unit or an M6C module b the maximum length for each conductor is ten metres. For greater distances, it is advised to twist the supply wires together b the 24 V DC supply wires must cross the power cables perpendicularly. If this is difficult, it is advised to twist the supply wires together b the technical characteristics of the external 24 V DC power-supply module for Micrologic control units are indicated on page 34. Communication bus b do not connect the positive terminal (E1) to earth b the negative terminal (E2) can be connected to earth b a number of "device" or "chassis" communication modules can be connected to the same 24 V DC power supply (the consumption of each module is approximately 30 mA) b the 24 V DC (E1, E2) power supply for the communication bus must be separate from the external 24 V DC power-supply module for Micrologic control units (F1-, F2+). E1
+

E2
-

E3
A/Tx-

E4
B/Tx+

E5
A'/Rx-

E6
B'/Rx+

To create a two-wire Modbus communication bus, simply connect Tx- with Rx- and Tx+ with Rx+. To connect a Modbus slave (Micrologic) to a Modbus master (PLC), connect: The slave Tx- to the master RxThe slave Rx- to the master TxThe slave Tx+ to the master Rx+ The slave Rx+ to the master Tx+

RS485 Modbus Junction Block

DB105137

Wiring of ZSI: it is recommended to use twisted shielded cable. The shield must be connected to earth at both ends.

150

Power connections for Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N, NSA160

Standard device
E54545 E59291A

With distribution connector

y 10 1.5 to 16 rigid 1.5 to 10 flexible (1) 2

L (mm) S (mm2) Cu / Al Tightening torque (Nm)

18 1.5 to 70 rigid 1.5 to 50 flexible 5

OFF

S
push to trip

(1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm2, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule.

E39432

Distribution connector

151

Installation recommendations

Power connections for Compact NS100 to 630 Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs
NS100
Bars L (mm) I (mm) d (mm) e (mm) (mm)
L e

NS160/250
y 25 d + 10 y 10 y6 8.5

NS400/630
y 32 d + 15 y 15 3 y e y 10 10.5

400 l L

y 25 d + 10 y 10 y6 6.5

E59292A

push to trip

E50702

L (mm) y 25 y 25 y 32 (mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5 Tightening torque (Nm) (1) 10 15 50 Tightening torque (Nm) (2) 5 5 20 (1) Tightening torque for lugs or bars on the circuit breaker. (2) Tightening torque for rear connections or terminal extensions on plug-in base.

Lugs

Connections with accessories - IEC228

NS100 to 250
Spreader Separate parts Tinned copper
E18599 E55599

NS100 to 250
Pole pitch One-piece spreader
Without spreaders With spreaders 35 mm 45 mm

Dimensions
E50702

With spreaders or terminal extensions NS100 NS160/250

Bars L (mm) l (mm) d (mm) e (mm) (mm) L (mm) (mm) (Nm) y 25 20 y I y 25 y 10 y6 6.5 y 25 6.5 10 (1), 5 (2) y 25 20 y I y 25 y 10 y6 8.5 y 25 8.5 15 (1), 5 (2)

Where U > 600 V, the mandatory insulation kit means separate spreaders cannot be used. The one-piece spreader must be used. Straight terminal extensions Tinned copper.
E18601

400 l L e

d
Lugs

Right-angle terminal extensions Tinned copper. Upstream side.

Tighten. torque (1) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on the circuit breaker. (2) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on plug-in base.

E18600

Spreaders, straight and right-angle terminal extensions are supplied with flexible interphase barriers.

NS400 and 600

Separate spreaders with 52.5 and 70 mm pole pitches Tinned copper Where U > 600 V, use of the 52.5 mm spreaders requires a specific insulation kit. The 70 mm spreaders may not be used. Right-angle terminal Edgewise terminal extensions extension Tinned copper Tinned copper Upstream side
E18600

NS400 and 630

Pole pitch
Without spreaders With spreaders
E50702

45 mm 52.5 ou 70 mm

Dimensions
Bars L (mm) l (mm) d (mm) e (mm) (mm) L (mm) (mm) (Nm)

With spreaders
y 40 d + 15 y 20 3 y e y 10 12,5 y 40 12,5 50 (1), 20 (2)

With terminal extensions

y 32 30 y I y 34 y 15 3 y e y 10 10,5 y 32 10,5 50 (1), 20 (2)

E18599

400 l L e

d L
Lugs

E21276

Tighten. torque (1) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on the circuit breaker. (2) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on plug-in base.

Spreaders, straight and right-angle terminal extensions are supplied with flexible interphase barriers.

E25961

Close-up view of two cables with lugs.

152

Connection of bare cables

NS100 to 250

E59293A

E54471

E58540

E54468

E54472

1-cable connector

Distribution connector

Polybloc distribution block

1-cable connector
E54545

Steel y 160A
20 1.5 to 95 (1) 12

Aluminium y 250A
20 1016 15 2535 20 50185 150 max. flex. 26

L (mm) S (mm2) Cu / Al Tightening torque (Nm)

6-cable distribution connector (copper or aluminium)

L (mm) S (mm2) Cu / Al Tightening torque (Nm) 15 or 30 1.5 to 6 (1) 8 to 35 4 6

Polybloc distribution block (6 or 9 cables)

L (mm) 12 S (mm2) Cu / Al 1.5 to 10 (1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm2, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule.

NS400 and 630

E54470

E54469

1-cable connector

2-cable connector

1-cable connector 1 cable

L

2-cable connector 2 cables

30 or 60 2 x 85 to 2 x 240 rigid 240 max. flexible 31

L (mm) S (mm2) Cu / Al Tightening torque (Nm)

20 35 to 300 rigid 240 max. flexible 31

E54545

Conductor materials and electrodynamic stresses

See page 155.

Ties for flexible bars and cables

See page 155.

153

Installation recommendations

Power connections for Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.) Insulation of live parts
Fixed Compact NS, front connections
NS100/250
U < 500 V

NS400/630N/H

NS400/630L

Interphase barriers Interphase barriers or long terminal or long terminal shields recommended. shields recommended. Insulated bars Insulated bars are mandatory. are mandatory. 500 V y U y 600 V Interphase barriers Interphase barriers Interphase barriers or long terminal or long terminal or long terminal shields are shields are shields are mandatory. mandatory. mandatory. Insulated bars Insulated bars Insulated bars are mandatory. are mandatory. are mandatory. U > 600 V Insulation kit Insulation kit Insulation kit and insulated bars and insulated bars and insulated bars are mandatory. are mandatory. are mandatory. The insulation kit is not compatible with: b separate spreaders for Compact NS100 to 250. The one-piece spreader must be used b separate spreaders (70 mm) for Compact NS400 and 630. For the 52.5 mm spreaders, there is a specific insulation kit.

Fixed Compact NS, rear connections

NS100/250
All voltage levels Short terminal shields recommended.

NS400/630N/H
Short terminal shields recommended.

NS400/630L
Short terminal shields recommended.

Withdrawable Compact NS, front and rear connections

NS100/250
All voltage levels Short terminal shields are mandatory. Insulated bars are mandatory.

NS400/630N/H

NS400/630L

Short terminal shields Short terminal shields are mandatory. are mandatory. Insulated bars Insulated bars are mandatory are mandatory. for U u 500 V. Use of an insulating screen (supplied with the plug-in base) is mandatory.

154

Power connections for Compact NS630b to 3200

Conductor materials and electrodynamic stresses

Compact circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with bare-copper, tinnedcopper and tinned-aluminium conductors (flexible or rigid bars, cables. In the event of a short-circuit, thermal and electrodynamic stresses will be exerted on the conductors. They must therefore be correctly sized and maintained in place using supports. Electrical connection points on all types of devices (switch-disconnectors, contactors, circuit breakers, etc.) should not be used for mechanical support. Any partition between upstream and downstream connections of the device must be made of non-magnetic material.
E59565A

Ties for flexible bars and cables

The table below indicates the maximum distance between ties depending on the prospective short-circuit current. The maximum distance between ties attached to the switchboard frame is 400 mm. Type of tie
Maximum distance between ties (mm) Short-circuit current (kA rms)

"Panduit" ties Width: 4.5 mm Maximum load: 22 kg Colour: white

200 10 100 15 50 20

"Sarel" ties Width: 9 mm Maximum load: 90 kg Colour: black

350 20 200 27 100 35 70 45 50 (double ties) 100

Note. For cables u 50 mm2, use 9 mm-wide ties.

E59566A E59567A

C
B

E59568A

Connection of bars
Bars must be adjusted to ensure correct positioning on the terminals before bolting (B). Bars must rest on a support firmly attached to the switchboard frame, such that the circuit-breaker terminals do not bear any weight (C). Electrodynamic forces The first spacer between bars must be positioned within a maximum distance (see table below) of the connection point to the circuit breaker. This distance is calculated to resist the electrodynamic stresses exerted between the bars of each phase during a short-circuit.
Maximum distance A between the circuit-breaker connection and the first spacer between bars, depending on the short-circuit current Isc (kA) 30 50 65 80 100 Distance (mm) 350 300 250 150 150

150 150

B
E59569A

C
E59570A

155

Installation recommendations

Power connections for Compact NS630b to 3200

DB100640

Connections
The quality of bar connections depends, among other things, on the tightening torques used for the nuts and bolts. Over-tightening may have the same consequences as under-tightening. The correct tightening torques for the connection of bars to the circuit-breaker terminals are indicated in the table below. The values below are for copper bars (Cu ETP-NFA51-100) and steel nuts and bolts (class 8.8). The same values apply to AGS-T52 quality aluminium bars (French standard NFA 02-104 and American National Standard H-35-1). Examples of bar connections
E47667B E47665 E47668

1 terminal screws, factory tightened to 13 Nm 2 circuit-breaker terminal 3 bars 4 bolt 5 washer 6 nut

Tightening torque for bars Rated diameter (mm) Drilling (mm) diameter 10 11

Tightening torque (Nm) with flat or grower washers 37.5

Tightening torque (Nm) with contact or split washers 50

Bar drilling
Examples
E47329A E47330A E47331A

Insulation distance

E47680A

X
Dimensions (mm)
Utilisation voltage Ui y 600 V Ui y 1000 V X minimum 8 mm 14 mm

Bar bending
Bars must be bent according to the table below. A tighter bend may cause cracks.

E47679A

r e

Dimensions (mm)
e 5 10 Radius r Minimum 5 15 Recommended 7.5 18 to 20

156

Sizing of bars
The following tables are based on the following assumptions: b maximum permissible temperature of bars is 100 C b Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections b busbars made of copper and not painted.
Note. The values presented in the tables are the result of trials and theoretical calculations on the basis of the assumptions mentioned above. These tables are intended as an aid in designing connections, however, the actual values must be confirmed by tests on the installation.

Front or horizontal rear connections

E59294A

Compact

Maximum service current

400 630 800 1000 1250 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2500 2800 3000 3200

Ti: 40 C Number of bars 5 mm thick 10 mm thick

2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 3b.50 x 5 3b.50 x 5 2b.80 x 5 2b.80 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 5 5b.100 x 5 6b.100 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.50 x 10 1b.63 x 10 2b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.80 x 10 2b.80 x 10 2b.100 x 10 3b.80 x 10 3b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 10

Ti: 50 C Number of bars 5 mm thick 10 mm thick

2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 3b.50 x 5 3b.50 x 5 2b.80 x 5 2b.80 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 5 6b.100 x 5 8b.100 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.63 x 10 2b.80 x 10 2b.80 x 10 2b.100 x 10 3b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 10 3b.100 x 10

Ti: 60 C Number of bars 5 mm thick 10 mm thick

2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 3b.63 x 5 3b.63 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.80 x 5 3b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 5 4b.100 x 5 5b.100 x 5 8b.100 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.63 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 10 2b.80 x 10 3b.63 x 10 2b.100 x 10 3b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 10 4b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 10

NS630b NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600 / 1600b NS1600 / 1600b NS2000 NS2000 NS2500 NS2500 NS3200 NS3200 NS3200

Note. With Compact NS630b to NS1600, it is recommended to use 50 mm wideness bars (see "Recommended busbars drilling").

157

Installation recommendations

Power connections for Compact NS630b to 3200 Sizing of bars

Vertical rear connections
E59422A

Compact

Maximum service current

400 630 800 1000 1250 1400 1600

Ti: 40 C Number of bars 5 mm thick 10 mm thick

2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 5 2b.63 x 5 2b.80 x 5 3b.63 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.50 x 10 1b.50 x 10 1b.63 x 10 1b.80 x 10 2b.50 x 10

Ti: 50 C Number of bars 5 mm thick 10 mm thick

2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 5 3b.50 x 5 2b.80 x 5 3b.63 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.50 x 10 1b.50 x 10 2b.40 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 10

Ti: 60 C Number of bars 5 mm thick 10 mm thick

2b.30 x 5 2b.40 x 5 2b.50 x 5 2b.63 x 5 3b.50 x 5 3b.63 x 5 3b.80 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 10 1b.50 x 10 1b.63 x 10 2b.40 x 10 2b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 10

NS630b NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600 NS1600

158

Power connections for Compact NS630b to 1600 Recommended drilling dimensions

Rear connection
E59308A E59308A

Rear connection with spreaders

E59309A E59310A

50

50

63 25,5 12,5 12 maxi

80 15 15 12 maxi

12,5

12,5 12 maxi

12,5

12,5 12 maxi

25

12,5

25

12,5

25

12,5

25 25

12,5

Middle left or middle right spreader for 4P

E59325A E59326A

Middle spreader for 3P

E59327A

Left or right spreader for 4P

77
E59328A

Left or right spreader for 3P

77 38,5 25 = = 13,5

77

77 38,5 25 = = 13,5

E59324B

44 25 9,5 12,5 60 12,5 2 11

38,5

25

13,5

38,5

25

13,5

30
82 52

30 82 52 15 5 11 25 52
52 25

30
82 52

30 82 52 15 5 11 25 52

15 5 11
25

15

5 11

52

Vertical rear connection

32

40

50

63

E59315 A

E59311A

E59312A

E59313A

E59314A

80

25
12,5

12 maxi

25

12 maxi

25

12 maxi

25

12 maxi

25

12 maxi

12,5

12,5

12,5

12,5

12,5

12,5 12,5

12,5

12,5

E59329B

60 12,5 12,5 9,5 25 44

2 11

Front connection
E59308A E59308A

Front connection with vertical-connection adapter

E59309A E59310A

50 12,5 12,5 12 maxi

50 12,5 12,5 12 maxi

63 25,5 12,5 12 maxi

80 15 15 12 maxi

25

12,5

25

12,5

25

12,5

25 25

12,5

E59332A

Top terminal
E94518

Bottom terminal
2 M10 screws

44

25
21

89 = =

12,5
15

9,5
15

25

15
101

3 11

21

2 M10 screws

15

25
44

15

9,5

15

20

159

Installation recommendations

Power connections for Compact NS1600b to 3200 Recommended drilling dimensions

Front connection (NS1600b to 2500)

E59308A E59309A

63

E59310A

50 12,5 12,5 12 maxi

80

15

15

25,5

12,5 12 maxi

12 maxi

25

12,5

25

12,5

25 25

12,5

E59462B

13 3 11

76 = =

25 = = 15

Front connection with vertical-connection adapter (NS1600b to 2500)

E59731A E59732A E59733A

63 12 maxi 25 25 25 12,5 12,5

80 12 maxi 25 25 25 12,5 12,5

100 12 maxi 25 25 25 12,5 12,5

12,5
E59734A

12 maxi 25 100 25 25 12,5

4 11
E59735A

25 25 25 20 45 60 12,5 15 20 25 25 80 60 100 20

Front connection (NS3200)

E59733A

100 12 maxi 25 25 25
12,5
E59734A

12 maxi 25 100 25 25 12,5

12,5
4 11
E59735A

12,5

25 25 25 20 45 60 12,5 15 20 25 25 80 60 100 20

160

Temperature derating Compact NS devices equipped with thermal-magnetic trip units

The values opposite are valid for fixed circuit breakers equipped with one of the following modules: b Vigi module b ammeter module b insulation-monitoring module b current-transformer module. They also apply to plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with one of the following modules: b ammeter module b current-transformer module. However, for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with a Vigi module or an insulationmonitoring module, the coefficients in the table below must be applied. Trip unit
TM16 to TM125 TM160 to TM250

When the ambient temperature is greater than 40 C, overload-protection characteristics are slightly modified. To determine tripping times using time/current curves, use Ir values corresponding to the thermal setting on the device, corrected as indicated in the tables below.

Single-pole and two-pole Compact NS

Rating (A)
16 25 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250

40 C
16 25 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250

45 C
15.6 24.5 39 61.5 78 97.5 122 156 195 244

50 C
15.2 24 38 60 76 95 119 152 190 238

55 C
14.8 23.5 37 58 74 92.5 116 147.2 185 231

60 C
14.5 23 36 57 72 90 113 144 180 225

65 C
14 22 35 55 70 87.5 109 140 175 219

70 C
13.8 21 34 54 68 85 106 136 170 213

Coefficient
1 0.9

Compact NS100 to 250 equipped with TM-D and TM-G trip units
Rating (A)
16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250

40 C
16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250

45 C
15.6 24.5 31.3 39 49 61.5 78 97.5 122 156 195 244

50 C
15.2 24 30.5 38 48 60 76 95 119 152 190 238

55 C
14.8 23.5 30 37 47 58 74 92.5 116 147.2 185 231

60 C
14.5 23 29.5 36 46 57 72 90 113 144 180 225

65 C
14 22 29 35 45 55 70 87.5 109 140 175 219

70 C
13.8 21 28.5 34 44 54 68 85 106 136 170 213

Compact NSA160
Rating (A)
16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160

40 C
16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160

45 C
15.6 24.5 31.3 39 49 61.5 78 97.5 122 156

50 C
15.2 24 30.5 38 48 60 76 95 119 152

55 C
14.8 23.5 30 37 47 58 74 92.5 116 147.2

60 C
14.5 23 29.5 36 46 57 72 90 113 144

65 C
14 22 29 35 45 55 70 87.5 109 140

70 C
13.8 21 28.5 34 44 54 68 85 106 136

161

Installation recommendations

Temperature derating Compact NS devices equipped with electronic trip units

Electronic trip units are not affected by variations in temperature. However, the maximum permissible current in the circuit breaker still depends on the ambient temperature.

The values opposite are valid for fixed circuit breakers equipped with one of the following modules: b Vigi module b ammeter module b insulation-monitoring module b current-transformer module. They also apply to plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with one of the following modules: b ammeter module b current-transformer module. However, for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with a Vigi module or an insulationmonitoring module, the coefficients in the table below must be applied. Circuit breaker Trip unit
NS100 NS160 NS250 NS250 STR22SE/GE 40 to 100 STR22SE/GE 40 to 160 STR22SE/GE 100 and 160 STR22SE/GE 250

Compact NS100...NS250
The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting depending on the ambient temperature. NS100-160
In: 40 to 160 A Ir max

40 C

45 C

50 C
1

55 C
1

60 C
1

65 C
1

70 C
1

no derating 1 1

NS250
In: 100 to 160A Ir max In: 250A Ir max

40 C

45 C

50 C
1 250 1

55 C
1 237.5 0.95

60 C
1 237.5 0.95

65 C
1 225 0.90

70 C
1 225 0.90

Coeff.
1 1 1 0.86

no derating 1 1 250 250 1 1

Compact NS400 and NS630

The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting depending on the ambient temperature. NS400
Fixed In: 400A Io/Ir max Plug-in / In: 400 withdrawable Io/Ir max

The values opposite are valid for fixed or plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with one of the following modules: b ammeter module b current-transformer module. However, for fixed or plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with a Vigi module or an insulationmonitoring module, the coefficients in the table below must be applied. Circuit breaker Trip unit
NS400N/H/L

40 C
400 1/1 400 1/1

45 C
400 1/1 390 1/0.98

50 C
400 1/1 380 1/0.95

55 C
390 1/0.98 370 1/0.93

60 C
380 1/0.95 360 1/0.9

65 C
370 1/0.93 350 1/0.88

70 C
360 1/0.9 340 1/0.85

NS630
Fixed In: 630A Io/Ir max Plug-in / In: 570A withdrawable Io/Ir max

40 C
630 1/1 570 1/0.9

45 C
615 1/0.98 550 1/0.88

50 C
600 1/0.95 535 1/0.85

55 C
585 1/0.93 520 1/0.83

60 C
570 1/0.9 505 1/0.8

65 C
550 1/0.88 490 0.8/0.98

70 C
535 1/0.85 475 0.8/0.95

Coeff.

STR23SE and 53UE 0.97 STR23SV and 53SV NS630N/H/L STR23SE and 53UE 0.9 STR23SV and 53SV Note. To provide the Visu function, Compact NS circuit breakers, with or without a Vigi module, are combined with INV switch-disconnectors. Tripping values for the selected combination are indicated in the Interpact catalogue.

Compact NS630b to NS1600 (1)

The table below indicates the maximum rated-current value for each type of connection, depending on the ambient temperature. For mixed connections, use the same derating values as for horizontal connections. Version Connection temp. Ti (2)
NS630b N/H/L NS800 N/H/L NS1000 N/H/L NS1250 N/H NS1600 N/H

Fixed device Front or horizontal rear 40 45 50 55

630 800 1000 1250 1600 630 800 1000 1250 1600 630 800 1000 1250 1560 630 800 1000 1250 1510

60
630 800 1000 1250 1470

65
630 800 1000 1240 1420

70
630 800 1000 1090 1360

Vertical rear 40 45
630 800 1000 1250 1600 630 800 1000 1250 1600

50
630 800 1000 1250 1600

55
630 800 1000 1250 1600

60
630 800 1000 1250 1600

65
630 800 1000 1250 1510

70
630 800 1000 1180 1460

Version Connection temp. Ti (2)

NS630b N/H/L NS800 N/H/L NS1000 N/H/L NS1250 N/H NS1600 N/H

Withdrawable device Front or horizontal rear 40 45 50 55

630 800 1000 1250 1600 630 800 1000 1250 1600 630 800 1000 1250 1520 630 800 1000 1250 1480

60
630 800 1000 1250 1430

65
630 800 1000 1170 1330

70
630 800 920 1000 1160

Vertical rear 40 45
630 800 1000 1250 1600 630 800 1000 1250 1600

50
630 800 1000 1250 1600

55
630 800 1000 1250 1560

60
630 800 1000 1250 1510

65
630 800 1000 1250 1420

70
630 800 990 1090 1250

Compact NS1600b to 3200

Version Connection temp. Ti (2) Fixed device Front or horizontal rear 40 45 50 55 Vertical rear 40 45

60

65

70

50

55

60

65

70

NS1600b N/H 1600 1600 1600 1600 1500 1450 1400 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1550 1500 NS2000 N/H 2000 2000 2000 2000 1900 1800 1700 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1900 1800 NS2500 N/H 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 NS3200 N/H 3200 3200 3200 3180 3080 2970 2860 (1) For a circuit breaker mounted in horizontal position, the derating to be applied is equivalent to that of a front or horizontal rear connected circuit breaker. (2) Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections.

162

Power dissipation / Resistance Compact NS devices equipped with thermal-magnetic trip units
Power dissipated per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W). Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (m). Total power dissipation is the value measured at In, 50/60 Hz, for a three-pole or four-pole circuit breaker (values above power P = 3RI2 ).

Compact NSC100N
Fixed device 3/4 poles NSC100N Rat. (A) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 70 80 100 100 R/pole 15 11.2 8 5.4 3.7 2.8 2 2 1.4 1 0.6 P/pole 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 7 8 10 9 10 6 Additional modules Vigi (N, L3) 0.06 0.1 0.16 0.26 0.4 0.63 1 1.3 1.6 2.5 2.5 Vigi (L1, L2) 0.06 0.1 0.16 0.26 0.4 0.63 1 1.3 1.6 2.5 2.5

NSC100NA

Compact NS100 to 250 equipped with TM-D and TM-G trip units
Fixed device 3/4 poles NS100 Rat. (A) R/pole 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 80 100 125 160 125 160 200 250 11.42 6.42 3.94 3.42 1.64 2.17 1.37 0.88 1.26 0.77 0.69 0.55 0.61 0.46 0.39 0.3 P/pole 2.92 4.01 4.03 5.47 4.11 8.61 8.77 8.8 8.06 7.7 10.78 13.95 9.45 11.78 15.4 18.75 Additional modules Vigi (N, L3) 0 0 0.06 0.10 0.15 0.3 0.4 0.7 0.4 0.7 1.1 1.8 1.1 1.8 2.8 4.4 Vigi (L1, L2) 0 0 0.03 0.05 0.08 0.15 0.2 0.35 0.2 0.35 0.55 0.9 0.55 0.9 1.4 2.2 WithAmmeter Transfo. module 0 0 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.5 0.8 1.3 drawable module 0 0 0.1 0 0.15 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.4 0.1 0.6 0.1 1 0.2 0.6 0.1 1 0.2 1.6 0.3 2.6 0.5 1.6 0.3 2.6 0.5 4 0.8 6.3 1.3

NS160

NS250

Compact NS80 and NS100 to 630 equipped with MA trip units

Fixed device 3 poles NS80H Rat. (A) R/pole 1.5 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 80 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 100 150 220 320 500 93.3 89.6 75.6 12.8 2.24 1.04 0.94 148.42 99.02 4.05 1.66 0.67 0.52 0.38 0.3 0.12 0.1 P/pole 0.21 0.56 3 2 1.4 2.6 6.02 0.93 3.93 0.63 1.04 1.66 5.2 8.55 14.52 12.29 25 Additional modules Vigi (N, L3) Vigi WithAmmeter Transfo. (L1, L2) drawable module module

NS100

NS160 NS250 NS400H/L NS630H/L

0 0 0 0 0.2 0.7 1.35 2.9 3.2 13.99

0 0 0 0 0.1 0.35 0.68 1.45 1.6 7

0 0 0 0.1 0.3 1 2.6 4.89 6.14 15

0 0 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.45 0.97 1.54 3.75

0 0 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.45 0.97 1.54 3.75

Single-pole and two-pole Compact NS100 to 160

Fixed device 1/2 poles NS100N/H Rat. (A) 16 20 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 R/pole 11.3 6.3 2.9 2.9 1.4 1.4 1.25 0.76 0.63 0.48 P/pole 2.89 2.52 2.61 4.64 3.5 5.56 8 7.6 9.84 12.29

NS160N/H

163

Installation recommendations

Power dissipation / Resistance Compact NS devices equipped with electronic trip units
Compact NS100 to NS630
Fixed device 3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Additional modules Vigi Vigi WithAmmeter Transfo.

The values indicated in the tables opposite are typical values. Power dissipated per pole (P/pole)in Watts (W) The value indicated in the table is the power dissipated at IN, 50/60 Hz, for a three-pole or fourpole circuit breaker (these values can be higher than the power calculated on the basis of the pole resistance). Measurement and calculation of the dissipated power are carried out in compliance with the recommendations of Annex G of standard IEC 60947-2. Resistance per pole (R/pole)in milliohms (m) The value of the resistance per pole is provided as a general indication for a new device. The value of the contact resistance must be determined on the basis of the measured voltage drop, in accordance with the manufacturers test procedure (instruction ABT no. 1 - BEE - 02.2 - A).
Note: this measurement is not sufficient to determine the quality of the contacts, i.e. the capacity of the circuit breaker to carry its rated current.

(N, L3) (L1, L2) drawable module module NS100 40 0.84 1.34 0.1 0.05 0.2 0.1 0.1 100 0.468 4.68 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2 NS160 40 0.73 1.17 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1 100 0.36 3.58 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2 160 0.36 9.16 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5 NS250 100 0.27 2.73 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.2 0.2 250 0.28 17.56 4.4 2.2 6.3 1.3 1.3 NS400 400 0.12 19.2 3.2 1.6 9.6 2.4 2.4 NS630 630 (1) 0.1 39.69 6.5 3.25 19.49 5.95 5.95 (1) The dissipation values for the Vigi modules and withdrawable circuit breakers are given for 570 A

Compact NSA160
Fixed device 3/4 poles NSA160 Rat. (A) R/pole 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 125 160 15 8 5.4 3.7 2.8 2 1.4 1 0.8 0.6 0.7 0.6 P/pole 4 5 5.5 6 7 8 9 10 12.5 15.4 11 15.4 Additional modules Vigi (N, L3) 0.06 0.16 0.26 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.9 6.4 Vigi (L1, L2) 0.06 0.16 0.26 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.9 6.4

NSA125NA NSA160NA

Compact NS630b to 1600

Version Fixed device Dissipated power N/H NS630b N/H/L NS800 N/H/L NS1000 N/H/L NS1250 N/H NS1600 N/H Version 30 45 65 130 220 L 45 60 100 Input/output resistance N/H 0.026 0.026 0.026 0.026 0.026 L 0.039 0.039 0.039

Withdrawable device Dissipated power N/H L 115 120 230 Input/output resistance N/H 0.038 0.038 0.038 0.036 0.036 L 0.072 0.072 0.072

NS630 N/H/L NS800 N/H/L NS1000 N/H/L NS1250 N/H NS1600 N/H

55 90 150 250 460

Compact NS1600b 3200

Version NS1600b N/H NS2000 N/H NS2500 N/H NS3200 N/H Fixed device Dissipated power 250 250 300 680 Input/output resistance 0.019 0.013 0.008 0.008

164

Compact NS

Additional characteristics

Presentation Functions and characteristics Installation recommendations Dimensions, volumes Connection Electrical diagrams

6 15 143 165 203 219

Tripping curves
Compact NSC100 and NS80H-MA Compact NSA160 Compact NS100 to 250 protection of distribution systems Compact NS100 to 250 motor-starter protection Compact NS400 to 630 protection of distribution systems Compact NS400 to 630 motor-starter protection Compact NS630b to 3200 Reflex tripping

254
252 253 254 257 258 259 260 261

Current-limiting curves
Catalogue numbers

262
265

251

Additional characteristics

Tripping curves Compact NSC100 and NS80H-MA

NSC100 - 1640 A
E94503

NSC100 - 5080 A
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2
16 A : Im = 37,5 x In 20 A : Im = 30 x In 25 A : Im = 24 x In 32 A : Im = 19 x In 40 A : Im = 15 x In
E94504

10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1

1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1

50 A : Im = 20 x In 63 A : Im = 16 x In 70 A : Im = 14,3 x In 80 A : Im = 12,5 x In

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

NSC100 - 100 A
E94505

NS80H-MA - MA1.5MA80
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2
100 A : Im = 12,5 x In
Im = 614 x In
E28466

10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1

1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

252

Tripping curves Compact NSA160

1640 A
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
16 A : Im = 37,5 x In 25 A : Im = 24 x In 32 A : Im = 19 x In 40 A : Im = 15 x In
E94506 E94507

5080 A
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
50 A : Im = 20 x In 63 A : Im = 16 x In 80 A : Im = 12,5 x In

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

100 A
E94508

125160 A
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2
100 A : Im = 12,5 x In 160 A : Im = 7,8 x In
E94509

10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1

1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1

125 A : Im = 10 x In

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

253

Additional characteristics

Tripping curves Compact NS100 to 250 Protection of distribution systems

TM magnetic trip units

TM16D / TM16G
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
TM16G : 4 x In TM16D : 12 x In
E28453 E28452

TM25D / TM25G
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
TM25G : 3.2 x In TM25D : 12 x In

reflex tripping : t < 10 ms

reflex tripping : t < 10 ms

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

TM32D / TM40D / TM40G

10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
TM32D : 12,5 x In TM40G : 2 x In TM40D : 12 x In
E28454 E28455

TM50D / TM63D / TM63G

10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5
TM50D : 10 x In TM63D : 8 x In

.2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1

TM63G : 2 x In

reflex tripping : t < 10 ms

reflex tripping : t < 10 ms

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

254

TM magnetic trip units (cont.)

TM80D / TM100D
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
reflex tripping: t < 10 ms NS100 Im = 8 x In NS160/250 Im = 12,5 x In
E28457 E28456

TM125D / TM160D
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
TM160D 8 x In TM125D 10 x In

reflex tripping : t < 10 ms

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

TM200D / TM250D
E28458

10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
Im = 5 10 x In

reflex tripping : t < 10 ms

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

255

Additional characteristics

Tripping curves Compact NS100 to 250 Protection of distribution systems (cont.)

STR22SE and STR22GE electronic trip units

STR22SE - 40100 A
E28459

STR22SE - 160250 A
E28460

10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
I = 11 x In
reflex tripping t < 10 ms Im = 210 x Ir Ir = 0.41 x In

10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5

Ir = 0.41 x In

t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1

I = 11 x In
reflex tripping t < 10 ms Im = 210 x Ir

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

STR22GE - 40100 A
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
I = 11 x In
reflex tripping : t < 10 ms Im = 210 x Ir Ir = 0.41 x In
E28409 E28410

STR22GE - 160250 A
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500
Ir = 0.41 x In

200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5

Im = 210 x Ir

.2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1

I = 11 x In
reflex tripping : t < 10 ms

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

256

Compact NS100 to 250 Motor-starter protection

MA magnetic trip units
MA2,5MA100
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
reflex tripping : t < 10 ms Im = 6 14 x In thermal withstand
E30212 E28467

MA150 and MA220

10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
Im = 9 14 x In thermal withstand MA220 MA150

reflex tripping : t < 10 ms

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

3 4 5 7 10 I / In

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

STR22ME electronic trip units

STR22ME - 10220 A
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
I = 15 x In reflex tripping : t < 10 ms Im = 13 x Ir class 10 (IEC 60947-4) Ir
E28370

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

257

Additional characteristics

Tripping curves Compact NS400 to 630 Protection of distribution systems

STR23 and STR53 electronic trip units

STR23SE / STR23SV
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
I = 11 x In
reflex tripping t < 10 ms Isd = 210 x Ir Ir = 0.41 x In
E28461 E94513

STR53UE / STR53SV
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
l t OFF
2

Ir = 0.41 x In

tr = 0.516 s Ii = 1.511 x In

Isd = 1.510 x Ir l 2 t OFF

0.3 0.2 0.1 0

reflex tripping : t < 10 ms

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20

5 7 10

20 30 I / In

50

Options for STR53UE

Earth-fault protection
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .05 .07 .1
I2t OFF
0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1
E28371

Ig = 0.21 x In

I2t ON

.2

.3 .4 .5 .7 1 I / In

7 10

20 30

258

Compact NS400 to 630 Motor-starter protection

MA magnetic and STR43ME electronic trip units
MA320MA500
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1
Im = 9 ... 14 x In thermal withstand
E28468 E28369

STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 10 A

10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5
Isd = 613 x Ir hot tripping curve cold tripping curve class 10 A

.2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1

Ii = 10,4 x In reflex tripping t < 10 ms

reflex tripping : t < 10 ms

3 4 5 7 10 I / In

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 10

10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5
Isd = 613 x Ir hot tripping curve cold tripping curve class 10
E38879 E38946

STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 20

10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5
Isd = 613 x Ir hot tripping curve cold tripping curve class 20

.2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1

Ii = 10,4 x In reflex tripping t < 10 ms

.2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .5 .7 1

Ii = 10,4 x In reflex tripping t < 10 ms

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

3 4 5 7 10 I / Ir

20 30

50 70 100

200 300

Thermal-withstand capacities are given for circuit breakers operating in an ambient temperature of 65 C.

259

Additional characteristics

Tripping curves Compact NS630b to 3200

Micrologic electronic control units

Micrologic 2.0
DB105144 DB105145

Micrologic 5.0, 6.0, 7.0

Options for Micrologic electronic control units

Earth-fault protection (Micrologic 6.0)
10 000 5 000 2 000 1 000 500 200 100 50 20 10 5 t(s) 2 1 .5 .2 .1 .05 .02 .01 .005 .002 .001 .05.07 .1
It
2
E46266

Ig = AJ x In (1) 1200 A max.

I2t ON

0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0

0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0

OFF

(1)

Ig = In x
.2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 I / In 2 3 5 7 10 200 300
Ig < 400 A 400 A y Ig y 1200 A Ig > 1200 A

A
0.3 0.2 500

B
0.3 0.3 640

C
0.4 0.4 720

D
0.5 0.5 800

E
0.6 0.6 880

F
0.7 0.7 960

0.8 0.9 1 0.8 0.9 1 1040 1120 1200

260

Reflex tripping

Compact NS100 to 630 devices incorporate the exclusive reflex-tripping system. This system breaks very high fault currents by mechanically tripping the device via a "piston" actuated directly by the pressure produced in the breaking units resulting from a short-circuit. For high short-circuits, this system provides a faster break and a trip guarantee, as well as natural total discrimination. Reflex-tripping curves are exclusively a function of the circuit-breaker rating.

E28463

TM160D...TM250D STR22SE250

20

NS630
STR22SE160

NS400 NS250
10 8 t (ms) 7 6 5 4
TM160D

TM16D...TM100D STR22SE40... 100

NS100-NS160

3 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200

kA rms

261

Additional characteristics

Current-limiting curves

The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is its aptitude to limit short-circuit currents.
E28800

Ics = 100 % Icu

The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NS range greatly reduces the forces created by fault currents in devices. The result is a major increase in breaking performance. In particular, the service breaking capacity Ics is equal to 100% of Icu. The Ics value, defined by IEC standard 60947-2, is guaranteed by tests comprising the following operations: b break three times consecutively a fault current equal to 100 % of Icu b check that the device continues to function normally: v it conducts the rated current without abnormal temperature rise v protection functions perform within the limits specified by the standard v suitability for isolation is not impaired.

Isc prospective Isc peak prospective current prospective Isc limited Isc peak limited Isc tc actual current

Longer service life of electrical installations

Current-limiting circuit breakers greatly reduce the negative effects of short-circuits on installations. Thermal effects Less temperature rise in conductors, therefore longer service life for cables. Mechanical effects Reduced electrodynamic forces, therefore less risk of electrical contacts or bus bars being deformed or broken. Electromagnetic effects Less disturbances for measuring devices located near electrical circuits.

The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NS range is due to the rotating double-break technique (very rapid natural repulsion of contacts and the appearance of two arc voltages in-series with a very steep wave front).

Economy by means of cascading

Cascading is a technique directly derived from current limiting. Circuit breakers with breaking capacities less than the prospective short-circuit current may be installed downstream of a limiting circuit breaker. The breaking capacity is reinforced by the limiting capacity of the upstream device. It follows that substantial savings can be made on downstream equipment and enclosures.

Current-limiting curves
The current-limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is expressed by two curves which are a function of the prospective short-circuit current (the current which would flow if no protection devices were installed): b the actual peak current (limited current), b thermal stress (A2s), i.e. the energy dissipated by the short-circuit in a conductor with a resistance of 1 . Example What is the real value of a 150 kA rms prospective short-circuit (i.e. 330 kA peak) limited by an NS250L upstream ? Answer: 30 kA peak (see next page).

Maximum permissible cable stresses

The table below indicates the maximum permissible thermal stresses for cables depending on their insulation, conductor (Cu or Al) and their cross-sectional area (CSA). CSA values are given in mm2 and thermal stresses in A2s.
CSA (mm2) PVC Cu Al PRC Cu Al CSA (mm2) PVC Cu Al PRC Cu Al 1.5 2.97 x 104 4.10 x 104 16 3.4 x 106 1.39 x 106 4.69 x 106 1.93 x 106 2.5 8.26 x 104 1.39 x 105 25 8.26 x 106 3.38 x 106 1.39 x 107 4.70 x 106 4 2.12 x 105 2.92 x 105 35 1.62 x 107 6.64 x 106 2.23 x 107 9.23 x 106 6 4.76 x 105 6.56 x 105 50 3.31 x 107 1.35 x 107 4.56 x 107 1.88 x 107 10 1.32 x 106 5.41 x 105 1.82 x 106 7.52 x 105

Example Is a Cu/PVC cable with a CSA of 10 mm2 adequately protected by an NS160N? The table above indicates that the permissible stress is 1.32x106 A2s. All short-circuit currents at the point where an NS160N (Icu = 35 kA) is installed are limited with a thermal stress less than 6 x 105 A2s (see next page). Cable protection is therefore ensured up to the limit of the breaking capacity of the circuit breaker.

262

Current-limiting curves
Circuit breaker Thermal NS80H-MA Cal. 80 A Cal. 80 A Cal. 50 A Cal. 50 A Cal. 50 A Cal. 25 A Cal. 25 A Cal. 12.5 A Cal. 12.5 A Cal. 12.5 A Cal. 6.3 A Cal. 6.3 A Cal. 2.5 A Cal. 2.5 A relay LRD-33 LRD-33 LRD-33 LRD-33 LRD-33 LRD-33 LRD-13 LRD-13 LRD-13 LRD-13 LRD-13 LRD-13 LRD-13 LRD-13 63 59 57 55 53 22 21 16 14 12 10 08 07 06 Contactor 63/80 48/65 37/50 30/40 23/32 17/25 12/18 09/13 07/10 5.5/08 04/06 2.5/04 1.6/2.5 01/1.6 LC1-D80 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D32 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D09

Voltage 400/440 V AC (1) Limited short-circuit current (k peak)

DB105147

20

80 A 80 A 50 A 50 A

10 8 7 6 5 4
I(k) 3

50 A 25 A 25 A 12.5 A 12.5 A 12.5 A

6.3 A

2
6.3 A

1 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4

2.5 A

2.5 A

10

20

30 40

60

100

200

300

kA rms

Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)

Thermal-stress curves
Circuit breaker Thermal NS80H-MA Cal. 80 A Cal. 80 A Cal. 50 A Cal. 50 A Cal. 50 A Cal. 25 A Cal. 25 A Cal. 12.5 A Cal. 12.5 A Cal. 12.5 A Cal. 6.3 A Cal. 6.3 A Cal. 2.5 A Cal. 2.5 A relay LRD-33 LRD-33 LRD-33 LRD-33 LRD-33 LRD-33 LRD-13 LRD-13 LRD-13 LRD-13 LRD-13 LRD-13 LRD-13 LRD-13 63 59 57 55 53 22 21 16 14 12 10 08 07 06 Contactor 63/80 48/65 37/50 30/40 23/32 17/25 12/18 09/13 07/10 5.5/08 04/06 2.5/04 1.6/2.5 01/1.6 LC1-D80 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D32 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D65 LC1-D09

Voltage 400/440V AC (1) Limited energy

DB105146

2 10 5 3 2 10
4 5

80 A 80 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 25 A 25 A 12.5 A 12.5 A 12.5 A

6.3 A 6.3 A

2 A S 5 3 2 10 5 3 2
3

2.5 A

2.5 A

10

20

30 40

60

100

200

300

kA rms

Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)

(1) Valid for 480 V Nema.

263

Additional characteristics

Current-limiting curves

Current-limiting curves
Voltage 400/440 V AC (1) Limited short-circuit current (k peak)
DB100451 E90272

Voltage 660/690 V AC Limited short-circuit current (k peak)

300
NS1600bN NS2000N NS2500N NS3200N NS630bN NS800N NS1000N NS1250N NS1600N NS630bL NS800L NS1000L

300
NS630bH NS800H NS1000H NS1250H NS1600H

200

100 80 70 60 50 kA peak40 30 20

NS630bN NS800N NS1000N NS1250N NS1600N

200 146
NS630bL NS800L NS1000L

H N H N N L

NS630 NS400 NS250 NS160 NS100

TM32...250 TM25

100 80 70 60 50 kA peak 40 30 20
N NH

NS630bH NS800H NS1000H NS1250H NS1600H

NS630

NS400
TC150/250/400

H L

NS250 NS160

NS100
TM40100 TM 25

TM16

10 8 7 6 5 4

10

20

30 40

60

100

200 300

10 8 7 6 5 4

TM 16

10

20

30 40

kA rms

kA rms

60 65

100

200 300

Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)

Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)

Thermal-stress curves
Voltage 400/440 V AC (1) Limited energy
DB100452 E90271

Voltage 660/690 V AC Limited energy

10 5
NS630bH NS800H NS1000H NS1250H NS1600H
9

10 5 3 2 10 5 3 2 10 As 5 3 2 10 5 3 2 10 5 3 2
2

NS630bN NS800N NS1000N NS1250N NS1600N

3 2 1,41 8 10 5 3 2
NS630bN NS800N NS1000N NS1250N NS1600N
7

NS1600bN NS2000N NS2500N NS3200N

NS630bH NS800H NS1000H NS1250H NS1600H

NS1000L NS630bL NS800L N N H H L NS630 L NS400

10
As 5
2

H N
6

NS630bL NS800L NS1000L NS630 L

L NS400
TC150/250/400

3 2 10 5 3 2 10 5 3 2
5

H L NS250 NS160

N N H

NS250 NS160 NS100

TM32250

NS100
TM 40100

TM 25 TM 16

TM25

TM16

10

20

30 40

60

100 150 200 300

10

20

30 40

kA rms

kA rms

60 65

100 150 200 300

Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)

Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)

(1) Valid for 480 V Nema.

264